HINDALCO INDUSTRIES LIMITED (UNIT: BIRLA COPPER)

HINDALCO INDUSTRIES LIMITED (UNIT: BIRLA COPPER)

PROPOSED EXPANSION PROJECT OF

CONTINUOUS CAST COPPER ROD

PREPARED BY:

ECO CHEM SALES & SERVICE A-WING, ASHOKA PAVILION, OFFICE FLOOR,

OPP. KAPADIA HEALTH CLUB, NEW CIVIL ROAD, SURAT-001

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

HINDALCO INDUSTRIES LIMITED (UNIT: BIRLA COPPER)

GGIIDDCC EEssttaattee,, DDaahheejj,, DDiisstt.. BBhhaarruucchh,, GGuujjaarraatt

EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall IImmppaacctt AAsssseessmmeenntt RReeppoorrtt

ffoorr

PPrrooppoosseedd EExxppaannssiioonn PPrroojjeecctt ooff

CCoonnttiinnuuoouuss CCaasstt CCooppppeerr RRoodd

PREPARED BY

ECO CHEM SALES & SERVICE (NABET ACCREDIATED CONSULTANT BY QCI)

A-Wing, Ashoka Pavilion, Office Floor, Opp. Kapadia Health Club, New Civil Road, Surat-001.

PROJECT PERSONNEL

Project Co-Ordinator

Mrs. Rekha Shah

Functional Area Experts & Team members:

Mrs. Rekha Shah Mr. Dhaval Shah

Mrs. Dipti Patel Mr. Sunil Patel

Mr. Sanjeev Sharma Mr. Nilesh Jogal

Mr. Nirzar Lakhia Mr. Hemlatta Patel

Mr. Harshit Sinha Ms. Foram Desai

Mr. Dhaval Jhaveri Mr. Rajat Gondaliya

Mr. Praful S. Patel Mr. Dipak Maru

Mr. Sunilkumar Pandey

F. No. J-11011/927/2008-IA.II(I)Government of India

Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change(LA. Division)

Indira Paryavaran BhawanJor Bagh Road, Aliganj,

New Delhi - 110003E-mail: [email protected]

Tele: 011: 24695316Dated: 8th January, 2016

TyV MIs Hindalco Industries Ltd

P.O- Dahej, District-BharuchGujrat-392130

Subject: Expansion of Continuous Cast Copper Rod Plant capacity from existing 2,40,000 TPA to 4, 84,000 TPA by setting up of a new CCR plant of 2, 44,000TPA capacity located at Village(s) Lakhigam and Dahej, Tehsil Vagra,District Bharuch in Gujarat by MIs Hindalco Industries Ltd. -prescribing ofToRs regarding.

Sir,

This has reference to your online application dated 24.09.2015 along with theapplication in prescribed format (Form-I), copy of pre-feasibility report and proposed TORsfor undertaking detailed EIA study as per the EIA Notification, 2006 for the projectmentioned above. The proposed project activity is listed at S.No. 3(a), under category 'A' ofthe Schedule ofEIA Notification, 2006 and appraised at the Central level.

2.0 Mis Birla Copper, a unit of Hindalco Industries Ltd. is having Copper Smelting andRefining complex at Village(s) Lakhigam and Dahej, Tehsil Vagra, District Bharuch inGujarat. The unit has proposed to convert the copper cathodes to cast copper (CC) rods toenhance the existing production capacity from 2,40,000 MT/annum to 4,84,000 MT/annumby commissioning a new plant having annual capacity of 2,44,000 MT/annum. It shall behaving additional facility to produce rods with Cu-Alloy and higher rod sizes.

Quantity( MT/Annum

I II IIIName of Product

Proposed CCR Total AfterExisting Plant (Expansion) Proposed

Expansion

Continuous Cast2,40,000 2,44,000 4,84,000

Copper Rod

Copper Cathode* 5,00,000 NIL 5,00,000 I

Sulphuric Acid 14,70,000 NIL 14,70,000

Phosphoric Acid 3,60,000 NIL 3,60,000

DAP!NPK Fertilizers 8,00,000 NIL 8,00,000

Precious Metals, Gold 26 NIL 26

Precious Metals, Silver 200 NIL 200

1

~'I"'J6(Dr. Satish C. Garkoti)

Scientist 'F'

Oxygen Plant 2150 NIL 2150

Power Plant 145.60 MW NIL 145.60 MW

3.0 The proposed CC Rod plant will be set-up in the existing copper smelter complexlocated at 2 1°42 'N latitude and n033'E longitude near Dahej , about 55 km west of Bharuchcity in Gujarat. This site has advantages such as availability of existing infrastructure , likeJetty, utilities, approach roads, colony, canteen, offices etc. The manufacturing processtechnology supplied by aNTIROD of M/s. SMS-Meer, Germany wil1 be used for new CCrod plant. The product (20334 TPM) will be copper rods (Dia 8 mm to 26 mm) in the form ofcoils . The coil 10 will be 1650 mm and 00 will be of 1000 mm. Coil weight will be 2.0 -5.0Mt.

4.0 Proposed plants will be set up in existing plant site. The area required for the plant i4680 m", The total water requirement for CC rod plant including the auxili ary consumption is400 m3/day. The total water requirement for the proposed plant will be met by GlD supplyas per their agreement. The power requirement for the new plant will be 2500 KW which willbe met by our existing captive generation/GEB drawl. The Liquid Natural Gas will beconsumed as fuel. Approximately 27000 SCM/day will be consumed. Total numbers ofemployees will be required 43 including managers, operators and workers.

5.0 The above proposal was cons idered b~ the Reconstituted Expert Appraisal Committee(Industry) during its 1st meeting held on 18t to 20th November, 2015 for prescribing TORsfor undertaking detailed EINEMP study.

6.0 Based on the information furnished and presentation made by the project proponent,the Committee recomm ended prescribing follow ing specific TORs for undertaking detailedEIA and EMP study in addition to the generic TORs enclosed at Annexure I read withadditional TORs at Anncx UI·e-2.

I. Public hearing is exempted for the proposalii. Compliance report from RO for all ECs granted so far should be submitted.

7.0 The undersigned is directed to inform that the Ministry of Environment, Forest andClimate hange (MoEF C) after accept ing the recommendation of the EAC (Industry),hereby decided to accord ToRs for the above project. Although, system generated automaticToRs for the project have been issued to you as per Ministry's directive, however, the finalEIA/EMP report should be submitted based on the ToRs issued to you vide this letter.

8.0 It is requested that the draft EIA Report may be prepared in accordance with theabove mentioned specific TORs and enclosed generic TORs and additional TORs andthereafter further necessary action including conduct of public consultation may be take/n (ifrequired) for obtaining Environment Clearance in accordance with the procedure prescribedunder the EIA Notification, 2006 as amended.

9.0 The TORs are valid for a period of three years from today i.e 8.01.2016 and willexpire on 7.01.2019. However, this period could be further extended by a maximum period ofone year provided an application is made by the project proponent at least three monthsbefore the expiry of the validity period , together with updated Form-I, based on properjustification.

2

Copy to:-

1. The Secretary, Department of Environment, Government of Gujarat.2. The Additional Principal Chief Conservator of Forests (C) Ministry of Environment

Forest & Climate Change Regional Office (WZ), E-5, Kendriya ParyavaranBhawan, ER-S Arera Colon, Link Road-3, Ravishankar Naga~

(Dr. Satish C. Garkoti)Scientist 'F'

3

ANNEXURE-I

GENERIC TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) IN RESPECT OF INDUSTRY SECTOR

I. Executive Summary2. Introduction

i. Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET accreditationii. Information about the project proponentiii. Importance and benefits of the project

3. Project Descriptioni. Cost of project and time of completion.ii. Products with capacities for the proposed project.iii. If expansion project, details of existing products with capacities and whether

adequate land is available for expansion, reference of earlier EC if any.iv. List of raw materials required and their source along with mode of

transportation.v. Other chemicals and materials required with quantities and storage capacitiesvi. Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste generation and their

management.vii. Requ irement of water, power, with source of supply, status of approval, water

balance diagram, man-power requirement (regular and contract)viii. Process description along with major equipments and machineries, process

flow sheet (quantative) from raw material to products to be providedix. Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems.x. Expansion/modernization proposals:

a. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s) including Amendmentsthereto obtained for the project from MOEF/SEIAA shall be attachedas an Annexure. A certined copy of the latest Monitoring Report of theRegional Office of the Ministry of Environment and Forests as percircular dated 30lh May, 20 12 on the status of compliance ofconditionsstipulated in all the existing environmental c learances includingAmendments shall be provided. In addition, status of compliance ofConsent to Operate for the ongoing lexisting operatio n of the projectfrom SPCB shall be attached with the EIA-EMP report.

b. In case the existing project has not obtained environmental clearance,reasons for not taking EC under the provisions of the EIA Notification1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be provided. Copies ofConsent to EstablishlNo Objection Certificate and onsent to Operate(in case of units operating prior to ElA Notification 2006 CTE andCTO of FY 2005-2006) obtained from the SPCB shall be submitted.Further, compliance report to the conditions of consents from theSPCB shall be submitted.

4. Site Details

i. Location of the project site covering village, Taluka/Tehsil, District and State,Justification for selecting the site, whether other sites were considered.

II. A toposheet of the study area of radius of IOkm and site location on1:50,000/1 :25,000 scale on an A3/A2 sheet. (including all eco-sensitive areasand environmentally sensitive places) ~

4

5.

iii. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners ofthe site.IV. Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site.v. Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as proposed unit indicating

storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located within anIndustrial area/Estate/Complex, layout of Industrial Area indicating location ofunit within the Industrial area/Estate.

vi. Photographs of the proposed and existing (if applicable) plant site. If existing,show photographs of plantation/greenbelt, in particular.

vii. Landuse break-up of total land of the project site (identified and acquired),government/private - agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies, settlements,etc shall be included. (not required for industrial area)

viii. A list of major industries with name and type within study area (lOkm radius)shall be incorporated. Land use details of the study area

ix. Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area shall beincluded.

x. Details of Drainage of the project upto 5km radius of study area. If the site iswithin 1 km radius of any major river, peak and lean season river discharge aswell as flood occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall data of the past 30years. Details of Flood Level of the project site and maximum Flood Level ofthe river shall also be provided. (mega green field projects)

Xl. Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not complete, stage of theacquisition process and expected time of complete possession of the land.

xii. R&R details in respect of land in line with state Government policy

Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable):

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

v.

vi.

Permission and approval for the use of forest land (forestry clearance), if any,and recommendations of the State Forest Department. (if applicable)Landuse map based on High resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of theproposed site delineating the forestland (in case ofprojects involving forestland more than 40 ha)Status of Application submitted for obtaining the stage I forestry clearancealong with latest status shall be submitted.The projects to be located within 10 km of the National Parks, Sanctuaries,Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the projectproponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Wardenshowing these features vis-it-vis the project location and the recommendationsor comments of the Chief Wildlife Warden-thereon.Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by the Chief Wildlife Wardenof the State Government for conservation of Schedule I fauna, if any exists inthe study area •Copy of application submitted for clearance under the Wildlife (Protection)Act, 1972, to the Standing Committee of the National Board for Wildlife.

ii.

6. Environmental Status I

i. Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and site-specific micro-meteorological data using temperature, relative humidity,hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall.AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PMI0, PM2.5, 802, NOX, COand other parameters relevant to the project shall be collected. The monitoringstations shall be based CPCB guidelines and take into account the predominant wind direction, population zone and sensitive receptors includingreserved forests.

5

iii. Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of all stations as perfrequency given in the NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009 along with - min.,max., average and 98% values for each of the AAQ parameters from data ofall AAQ stations should be provided as an annexure to the EIA Report.

iv. Surface water quality of nearby River (60m upstream and downstream) andother surface drains at eight locations as per CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines.

v. Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of river identified by theCPCB/MoEF&CC.

vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations shall be included.vii. Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the study area.viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines.IX. Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles, frequency of vehicles for

transportation of materials, additional traffic due to proposed project, parkingarrangement etc.

x. Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) existing in thestudy area shall be given with special reference to rare, endemic andendangered species. If Schedule-I fauna are found within the study area, aWildlife Conservation Plan shall be prepared and furnished.

xi. Socio-economic status of the study area.

7. Impact Assessment and Environment Management Plan

i. Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the stackemission based on site-specific meteorological features. In case the project islocated on a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modelling shall be done using inputs ofthe specific terrain characteristics for determining the potential impacts of theproject on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions (includingtransportation) on the AAQ of the area shall be well assessed. Details of themodel used and the input data used for modeling shall also be provided. Theair quality contours shall be plotted on a location map showing the location ofproject site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if any.

ii. Water Quality modelling - in case, if the effluent is proposed to be dischargedin to the local drain, then Water Quality Modelling study should be conductedfor the drain water taking into consideration the upstream and downstreamquality of water of the drain.

iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on thesurrounding environment shall be assessed and provided. In this regard,options for transport of raw materials and finished products and wastes (largequantities) by rail or rail-cum road transport or conveyor-cum-rail transportshall be examined.

iv. A note on treatment of wastewater from different plant operations, e'Stentrecycled and reused for different purposes shall be included. Completescheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of untreated and treated effluentto meet the prescribed standards of discharge under E(P) Rules.

v. Details of stack emission and action plan for control of emissions to meetstandards.

vi. Measures for fugitive emission controlvii. Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage, utilization and

disposal. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid and hazardous wasteshall also be included. EMP shall include the concept of waste-minimization,recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy conservation, and natural resourceconservation. h,;

6

viii. Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009.A detailed plan of action shall be provided.

IX. Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33 % area i.e. land with notless than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species, width of plantation,planning schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be around theproject boundary and a scheme for greening of the roads used for the projectshall also be incorporated.

x. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site shall be submittedto harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge theground water and also to use for the various activities at the project site toconserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement from other sources.

xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for environmental pollutioncontrol measures shall be included.

xii. Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring shall be submitted.xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made) Preparedness and

Emergency Management Plan including Risk Assessment and damage control.Disaster management plan should be linked with District DisasterManagement Plan.

8. Occupational health

9.

I.

ii.

iii.

iv.

Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the exposurelevels of above mentioned hazards and whether they are within PermissibleExposure level (PEL). If these are not within PEL, what measures thecompany has adopted to keep them within PEL so that health of the workerscan be preserved,Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the workers'health is being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry,Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision, colour vision and any otherocular defect) ECG, during pre placement and periodical examinations givethe details of the same. Details regarding last month analyzed data ofabovementioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of exposure anddepartment wise.Annual report of heath status of workers with special reference toOccupational Health and Safety.Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of allcontract and casual workers.

Corporate Environment Policy

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved by itsBoard of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report.Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard operating process /procedures to bring into focus any infringement / deviation / violation of theenvironmental or forest norms / conditions? If so, it may be detailed in theEIA.What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of the company todeal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with theenvironmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given.Does the company have system of reporting of non compliances / violations ofenvironmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and / orshareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism shall bedetailed in the EIA report

7

10. Details regard ing infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to beprovided to the labour force during construction as well as to the casual workersincluding truck drivers during operation phase.

11 . Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)

I. Adequate funds ( atleast 2.5 % of the project cost) shall be earmarked towardsthe Enterprise Social Commitment based on Public Hearing issues and itemwise details along with time bound action plan shall be included. Socioeconomic development activities need to be elaborated upon.

12. Any litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by anyCourt of Law against the project, if so, details thereof shall also be included. Has theunit received any notice under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 orrelevant Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and com pliance/ATR tothe notice(s) and present status of the case .

13. 'A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of above TORs.

14. The TORs prescribed shall be valid for a period of three years for submission of theEIA-EMP reports along with Public Hearing Proceedings (wherever stipulated).

The following general points shall be noted:

I. All documents shall be properly indexed, page numbered.ii. Period/date of data collection shall be clearly indicated.

iii. Authenticated English translation of all material in Regional languages shall beprovided.

IV. The letter/application for environmental clearance shall quote the MOEF file No. andalso attach a copy of the letter.

v. The copy of the letter received from the Ministry shall be also attached as an annexureto the final EIA-EMP Report.

vi. The index of the final EIA-EMP report must indicate the specific chapter and page no.of the EIA-EMP Report

vii. While preparing the EIA report, the instructions for the proponents and instructionsfor the consultants issued by MOEF vide a.M. No. J-l1013/41/2006-IA.II (I) dated4th August, 2009, which are available on the website of this Ministry shall also befollowed.

viii. The consultants involved in the preparation of EIA-EMP report after accreditationwith Quality Council of India (QC1) !National Accreditation Board of Education andTraining (NABET) would need to include a certificate in this regard in the EIA-EMPreports prepared by them and data provided by other organization/Laboratoriesincluding their status of approvals etc. Name of the Consultant and the Accreditationdetails shall be posted on the EIA-EMP Report as well as on the cover of the HardCopy of the Presentation material for EC presentation.

IX. TORs' prescribed by the Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry) shall be consideredfor preparation of EIA-EMP report for the project in addition to all the relevantinformation as per the 'Generic Structure of EIA' given in Appendix III and IlIA inthe EIA Notification, 2006. Where the documents provided are in a language otherthan English, an Engl ish translation shall be provided. The draft EIA-EMP reportshall be submitted to the State Pollution Control Board of the concerned State forconduct of Public Hearing. The SPCB shall conduct the Public Hearing/public

~8

consultation, district-wise, as per the provisions of EIA notification, 2006. The PublicHearing shall be chaired by an Officer not below the rank of Additional DistrictMagistrate. The issues raised in the Public Hearing and during the consultationprocess and the commitments made by the project proponent on the same shall beincluded separately in EIA-EMP Report in a separate chapter and summarised in atabular chart with financial budget (capital and revenue) along with time-schedule ofimplementation for complying with the commitments. made. The final EIA reportshall be submitted to the Ministry for obtaining environmental clearance.

"''''''''''''''''''''''

9

ToR Compliance Report

Sr.

No.

ToR Points Compliance

1 Executive Summary Executive Summary in Chapter - 9

2 Introduction -

i. Details of the EIA Consultant including

NABET accreditation Complied

NABET certification of the EIA Consultant is

attached in EIA report & in Chapter – 10.

ii. Information about the project proponent Information about the project proponent is given

in Section 1.1of chapter - 1, page no.14.

iii. Importance and benefits of the project

Complied

For importance of the project refer Section 2.1

of Chapter-2, page no 28-30 and benefits of the

project are mentioned in Section 7.2, 7.3 of

Chapter – 7, page no 225-230

3 Project Description

i. Cost of project and time of completion Complied

Cost of the proposed expansion project is Rs.

240 crores. Detailed cost break up is mentioned

in Subsection 2.4.5 of Section 2.5 of Chapter -

2, page no 48.

ii. Products with capacities for the proposed

project. Complied

Refer Section 2.5 of Chapter-2, page no 53.

iii. If expansion project, details of existing

products with capacities and whether

adequate land is available for expansion,

reference of earlier EC if any.

Complied

For existing product details refer Section 2.5 of

Chapter-2, page no 48-50.

Adequate land is available within the existing

unit and under the possession of the proponent.

Hence, no additional land is required for the

proposed expansion.

Earlier EC attached as Annexure – 1.

iv. List of raw materials required and their

source along with mode of transportation. Complied

Refer Section 2.5 of Chapter-2, page no 49-50.

v. Other chemicals and materials required

with quantities and storage capacities Complied


vi. Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous

waste generation and their management. Complied

Refer Subsection 2.8.1 of Section 2.8 of

Chapter-2, page no 61-64.

vii. Requirement of water, power, with source

of supply, status of approval, water balance

diagram, man-power requirement (regular

and contract)

Complied


Water balance diagram is described in Fig. no.

4.7 of Subsection 4.5.3 of Section 4.5 of

Chapter 4, page no 153.

viii. Process description along with major Complied


equipment and machineries, process flows

sheet (quantative) from raw material to

products to be provided

Refer Section 2.6 of Chapter-2, page no 53-60

ix. Hazard identification and details of

proposed safety systems. Complied

Refer Chapter-6 of EIA report.

x. Expansion/modernization proposals:

a. Copy of all the Environmental

Clearance(s) including Amendments

thereto obtained for the project from

MOEF/SEIAA shall be attached as an

Annexure. A certified copy of the latest

Monitoring Report of the Regional

Office of the Ministry of Environment

and Forests as per circular dated 30th

May, 2012 on the status of compliance

of conditions stipulated in all the

existing environmental clearances

including Amendments shall be

provided. In addition, status of

compliance of Consent to Operate for

the ongoing/ existing operation of the

project from SPCB shall be attached

with the EIA-EMP report.

Complied

Earlier EC attached as Annexure – 1 and

CC&A is attached as Annexure-2.

Compliance report for the same is attached as

Annexure-9 and Annexure-10.

b.In case the existing project has not

obtained environmental clearance,

reasons for not taking EC under the

provisions of the EIA Notification 1994

and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be

provided. Copies of Consent to

Establish/No Objection Certificate and

Consent to Operate (in case of units

operating prior to EIA Notification

2006, CTE and CTO of FY 2005- 2006)

obtained from the SPCB shall be

submitted. Further, compliance report to

the conditions of consents from the

SPCB shall be submitted.

Not Applicable

4 Site Details

i. Location of the project site covering

village, Taluka/Tehsil, District and State,

Justification for selecting the site, whether

other sites were considered.

Complied

Project location details are mentioned in Section

2.2 of Chapter – 2, page no. 30.

Site Justification criteria are given in Sub-


Section 2.2.1 of Section 2.2 of Chapter – 2,

page no. 31.

ii. A toposheet of the study area of radius of

10km and site location on

1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an A3/A2

sheet. (including all eco-sensitive areas and

environmentally sensitive places)

Topography of the study area supported by

toposheet is attached in section 2.3, Pg No: 38

of Chapter-2 of EIA report.

The proposed site shall be developed only within

the exiting premises of HIL‘s existing unit.

Hence, the site is well developed and leveled and

does not require any filling.

iii. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners

of the site. Complied

4-corner co-ordinates are mentioned in Section


iv. Google map-Earth downloaded of the

project site. Complied

Google map is given in Figure 2.1 and Figure

2.2 of Chapter - 2, page no. 32-33.

v. Layout maps indicating existing unit as

well as proposed unit indicating storage

area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc.

If located within an Industrial

area/Estate/Complex, layout of Industrial

Area indicating location of unit within the

Industrial area/Estate.

Complied

Layout map is given in Figure 2.3 & Figure

2.4, page no. 34-35.

vi. Photographs of the proposed and existing

(if applicable) plant site. If existing,

show photographs of plantation/greenbelt,

in particular.

Complied

Photographs are given in Subsection 2.4.2 of

Section 2.4 of Chapter – 2, page no. 43-44.

Photographs of existing greenbelt are given in

Section 8.5 of chapter-8, page no. 256.

vii. Land use break-up of total land of the

project site (identified and acquired),

government/private - agricultural, forest,

wasteland, water bodies, settlements, etc

shall be included. (not required for

industrial area)

Complied

Landuse breakup is given in Subsection 2.4.3 of

Section 2.4 of Chapter – 2, page no. 47

viii. A list of major industries with name and

type within study area (10km radius) shall

be incorporated. Land use details of the

study area

Complied

List of surrounding industries is given in Table


ix. Geological features and Geo-hydrological

status of the study area shall be included. Complied

Geological details given in Section 2.3 of

Chapter – 2, page no. 39

x. Details of Drainage of the project upto 5km

radius of study area. If the site is within 1 Complied

Drainage details are given in Figure no. 2.3 of


km radius of any major river, peak and lean

season river discharge as well as flood

occurrence frequency based on peak

rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of

Flood Level of the project site and

maximum Flood Level of the river shall

also be provided. (mega green field

projects)

Chapter – 2, page no. 34.

xi. Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition

is not complete, stage of the acquisition

process and expected time of complete

possession of the land.

Complied

Land is in the possession of the proponent. Land

documents are attached as Annexure – 3.

xii. R&R details in respect of land in line with

state Government policy Not Applicable

5 Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable):

i. Permission and approval for the use of

forest land (forestry clearance), if any, and

recommendations of the State Forest

Department. (if applicable)

Not Applicable

As no forest land will be acquired.

ii. Land use map based on High resolution

satellite imagery (GPS) of the proposed site

delineating the forestland (in case of

projects involving forest land more than 40

ha)

Complied

Landuse map is given in Figure no. 3.6.1 of

Chapter – 3, page no. 96.

iii. Status of Application submitted for

obtaining the stage I forestry clearance

along with latest status shall be submitted.

Not Applicable

No forest land will be acquired/involved for

carrying out the proposed expansion. Hence, no

forest clearance is required to be obtained.

iv. The projects to be located within 10 km of

the National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere

Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild

Animals, the project proponent shall

submit the map duly authenticated by Chief

Wildlife Warden showing these features

vis-à-vis the project location and the

recommendations or comments of the

Chief Wildlife Warden-thereon

Not Applicable

No forest land will be acquired/involved for

carrying out the proposed expansion.

v. Wildlife Conservation Plan duly

authenticated by the Chief Wildlife Warden

of the State Government for conservation

of Schedule I fauna, if any exists in the

study area

Not Applicable

vi. Copy of application submitted for

clearance under the Wildlife (Protection) Not Applicable


Act, 1972, to the Standing Committee of

the National Board for Wildlife

6 Environmental Status

i. Determination of atmospheric inversion

level at the project site and site-specific

micro-meteorological data using

temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind

speed and direction and rainfall.

Complied

Micro-meteorological data including

temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind

speed and direction and rainfall is given in

Section 3. 3 of Chapter – 3, page no. 74-80

ii. AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations

for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO and

other parameters relevant to the project

shall be collected. The monitoring stations

shall be based CPCB guidelines and take

into account the pre-dominant wind

direction, population zone and sensitive

receptors including reserved forests.

Complied

AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO and other

parameters relevant to the project shall be is

given in Section 3.4 of Chapter - 3, page no.

81-88.

iii. Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12

weeks of all stations as per frequency given

in the NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009

along with – min., max., average and 98%

values for each of the AAQ parameters

from data of all AAQ stations should be

provided as an annexure to the EIA Report.

Complied

Raw data for all AAQ measurement is given in

Annexure – 11.

iv. Surface water quality of nearby River (60

m upstream and downstream) and other

surface drains at eight locations as per

CPCB/MoEF& CC guidelines.

Complied

Surface water quality of nearby surface water

body is given in Subsection 3.8.7 of Section 3.8

of Chapter -3, page no 107-112.

v. Whether the site falls near to polluted

stretch of river identified by the

CPCB/MoEF&CC.

Not Applicable

Since there is no polluted stretch of river within

the study area.

vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8

locations shall be included. Complied

Ground water quality monitoring is given in

Subsection 3.8.4 of Section 3.8 of Chapter -3,

page no 101-106

vii. Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations

within the study area. Complied

Noise quality monitoring is given in Section 3.5

of Chapter -3, page no 89-93

viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines. Complied

Soil quality monitoring is given in Section 3.7

of Chapter -3, page no 97-99.

ix. Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles,

frequency of vehicles for transportation of

materials, additional traffic due to proposed

project, parking arrangement etc.

Complied

Traffic management plan is given in Subsection

4.5.8 of Section 4.5 of Chapter - 4, page no

162-163

x. Detailed description of flora and fauna Complied


(terrestrial and aquatic) existing in the

study area shall be given with special

reference to rare, endemic and endangered

species. If Schedule-I fauna are found

within the study area, a Wildlife

Conservation Plan shall be prepared and

furnished.

Flora fauna details are given in Section 3.9 of

Chapter -3, page no 116-124

xi. Socio-economic status of the study area.

7 Impact Assessment and Environment

Management Plan

i. Assessment of ground level concentration

of pollutants from the stack emission based

on site-specific meteorological features. In

case the project is located on a hilly terrain,

the AQIP Modelling shall be done using

inputs of the specific terrain characteristics

for determining the potential impacts of the

project on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of

all sources of emissions (including

transportation) on the AAQ of the area

shall be well assessed. Details of the model

used and the input data used for modeling

shall also be provided. The air quality

contours shall be plotted on a location map

showing the location of project site,

habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if

any.

Complied

Assessment of ground level concentration of

pollutants from the stack emission based on site-

specific meteorological features, cumulative

impact of all sources of emissions and model

study is mentioned in Subsection 4.5.2 of

Section 4.5 of Chapter – 4, page no. 139-151

ii. Water Quality modelling – in case, if the

effluent is proposed to be discharged in to

the local drain, then Water Quality

Modelling study should be conducted for

the drain water taking into consideration

the upstream and downstream quality of

water of the drain.

Complied

The proposed project is a Zero Liquid Discharge

Unit, hence no water shall be discharged outside

the unit.

Hence, no water modelling study is required.

iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materials

and end products on the surrounding

environment shall be assessed and

provided. In this regard, options for

transport of raw materials and finished

products and wastes (large quantities) by

rail or rail cum road transport or conveyor-

cum-rail transport shall be examined.

Complied

Refer Subsection 4.5.2 of Section 4.5 of

Chapter – 4, page no 139-141.

iv. A note on treatment of wastewater from

different plant operations, extent recycled

and reused for different purposes shall be

included. Complete scheme of effluent

Complied

ETP scheme is given in Subsection 8.3.3 of

Section 8.3 of chapter – 8, page no. 238-246.

Characteristics of untreated and treated effluent


treatment. Characteristics of untreated and

treated effluent to meet the prescribed

standards of discharge under E (P) Rules.

to meet the prescribed standards of discharge

under E (P) Rules is given Subsection 8.3.3 of

Section 8.3 of chapter – 8, page no. 239

v. Details of stack emission and action plan

for control of emissions to meet standards. Complied

Details of stack emission are mentioned in

Subsection 2.8.1 of Section 2.8 of Chapter – 2,

page no 62. Action plan for control of emissions is described

in Subsection 8.3.2 of Section 8.3 of Chapter –

8, page no 236-238

vi. Measures for fugitive emission control Complied

Action plan for control of fugitive emissions is

described in Subsection 8.3.2 of Section 8.3 of

Chapter – 8, page no 236-238

vii. Details of hazardous waste generation and

their storage, utilization and disposal.

Copies of MOU regarding utilization of

solid and hazardous waste shall also be

included. EMP shall include the concept of

waste-minimization, recycle/ reuse/ recover

techniques, Energy conservation, and

natural resource conservation.

Complied

Details of hazardous waste generation and their

storage, utilization and disposal is described in


page no 65

viii. Proper utilization of fly ash shall be

ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009.

A detailed plan of action shall be provided.

NA

ix. Action plan for the green belt development

plan in 33 % area i.e. land with not less

than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of

species, width of plantation, planning

schedule etc. shall be included. The green

belt shall be around the project boundary

and a scheme for greening of the roads

used for the project shall also be

incorporated.

Complied

Action Plan for greenbelt development is

described in Section 8.5 of Chapter – 8, page

no 256-262.

x. Action plan for rainwater harvesting

measures at plant site shall be submitted to

harvest rainwater from the roof tops and

storm water drains to recharge the ground

water and also to use for the various

activities at the project site to conserve

fresh water and reduce the water

requirement from other sources.

Complied

Action Plan for Rainwater Harvesting is

described in Section 8.6 of Chapter – 8, page

no 262.

xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum

for environmental pollution control

measures shall be included.

Complied

Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for

environmental pollution control measures is


given in Section 8.7 of Chapter – 8, page no

264

xii. Action plan for post-project environmental

monitoring shall be submitted. Complied

Action plan for post-project environmental

monitoring is given in Section 5.4 of Chapter –

5, page no 177-178.

xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and

Man-made) Preparedness and Emergency

Management Plan including Risk

Assessment and damage control. Disaster

management plan should be linked with

District Disaster Management Plan.

Complied

Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-

made) Preparedness and Emergency

Management Plan is well developed in the

existing unit of the proponent. Details are given

in Part – 2 of Chapter – 6, page no 197-221.

8 Occupational health

i. Details of existing Occupational & Safety

Hazards. What are the exposure levels

of above mentioned hazards and whether

they are within Permissible Exposure level

(PEL). If these are not within PEL, what

measures the company has adopted

to keep them within PEL so that health of

the workers can be preserved,

Complied

Details of existing Occupational & Safety

Hazards are mentioned in Section 6.9 of

Chapter - 6, page no 223-225.

ii. Details of exposure specific health status

evaluation of worker. If the workers’ health

is being evaluated by pre designed format,

chest x rays, Audiometry, Spirometry,

Vision testing (Far & Near vision, colour

vision and any other ocular defect) ECG,

during pre-placement and periodical

examinations give the details of the same.

Details regarding last month analyzed data

of abovementioned parameters as per age,

sex, duration of exposure and department

wise.

Complied

Detailed health check up of workers will be

carried out for x rays, Audiometry, Spirometry,

Vision testing (Far & Near vision, colour vision

and any other ocular defect) ECG, etc. during

pre-placement and periodical examinations.

Records of the same shall also be maintained.

iii. Annual report of health status of workers

with special reference to Occupational

Health and Safety.

Complied

Annual health report of the workers shall be

maintained with reference to Occupational

Health and Safety.

Records of the same are attached as Annexure –

8.

iv. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the

occupational health & safety of all contract

and casual workers.

Complied

Budget has been allocated towards occupational

health and safety for the employees and contract

workers.

9 Corporate Environment Policy

i. Does the company have a well laid down Complied


Environment Policy approved by its Board

of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the

EIA report.

The company has a well laid down

environmental policy which is attached as

Annexure – 7.

ii. Does the Environment Policy prescribe for

standard operating process / procedures to

bring into focus any infringement /

deviation / violation of the environmental

or forest norms / conditions? If so, it may

be detailed in the EIA.

Complied

The Environment Policy prescribes for standard

operating process/procedures to bring into focus

any infringement / deviation / violation of the

environmental or forest norms / conditions.

iii. What is the hierarchical system or

Administrative order of the company to

deal with the environmental issues and for

ensuring compliance with the

environmental clearance conditions?

Details of this system may be given.

Complied

The company has existing EMC with a well-

defined hierarchical system to deal with the

environmental issues and for ensuring

compliance with the environmental clearance

conditions which is described in Section 8.8 of

Chapter-8, page no. 266-267.

iv. Does the company have system of

reporting of non-compliances / violations

of environmental norms to the Board of

Directors of the company and / or

shareholders or stakeholders at large? This

reporting mechanism shall be detailed in

the EIA report

Complied

The company has a well-defined EMC for

reporting of non-compliances / violations of

environmental norms to the Board of Directors

of the company and / or shareholders or

stakeholders, which is described in Section 8.8

of Chapter-8, page no. 265-266.

10 Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as

sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to

the labour force during construction as well as to

the casual workers including truck drivers during

operation phase.

Complied

Since the proposed project is an expansion

project, the existing unit has well developed

infrastructure facilities which is described in


page no. 159

11 Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)

i. Adequate funds (at least 2.5 % of the

project cost) shall be earmarked towards

the Enterprise Social Commitment based

on Public Hearing issues and item-wise

details along with time bound action plan

shall be included. Socio-economic

development activities need to be

elaborated upon.

Complied

A budget is allotted towards ESC for carrying

out socio-economic activities for the

surrounding community.

Details are mentioned in Section 8.9 of Chapter

– 8, page no. 266-267.

12 Any litigation pending against the project and/or

any direction/order passed by any Court of Law

against the project, if so, details thereof shall also

be included. Has the unit received any notice

under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection)

Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of Air and Water

Acts? If so, details thereof and compliance/ATR

to the notice(s) and present status of the case.

Complied

No litigation pending against the proponent.


13 A tabular chart with index for point wise

compliance of above TORs. Complied

14 The TORs prescribed shall be valid for a period

of three years for submission of the EIA-EMP

reports along with Public Hearing Proceedings

(wherever stipulated).

Agreed and Complied

The following general points shall be noted:

i. All documents shall be properly indexed,

page numbered. Agreed and complied

ii. Period/date of data collection shall be

clearly indicated. Agreed and complied

The monitoring period is March to May 2015.

iii. Authenticated English translation of all

material in Regional languages shall be

provided.

Agreed

iv. The letter/application for environmental

clearance shall quote the MOEF file No.

and also attach a copy of the letter.

Complied

MoEF file no. J-11011/927 2008 IA II(I)

v. The copy of the letter received from the

Ministry shall be also attached as an

annexure to the final EIA-EMP Report.

Agreed and complied

vi. The index of the final EIA-EMP report

must indicate the specific chapter and page

no. of the EIA-EMP Report

Agreed and Complied

vii. While preparing the EIA report, the

instructions for the proponents and

instructions for the consultants issued by

MOEF vide O.M. No. J-11013/41/2006-

IA.II (I) dated 4th

August, 2009, which are

available on the website of this Ministry

shall also be followed.

Complied

viii. The consultants involved in the preparation

of EIA-EMP report after accreditation with

Quality Council of India (QCl) /National

Accreditation Board of Education and

Training (NABET) would need to include a

certificate in this regard in the EIA-EMP

reports prepared by them and data provided

by other organization/ Laboratories

including their status of approvals etc.

Name of the Consultant and the

Accreditation details shall be posted on the

EIA-EMP Report as well as on the cover of

the Hard Copy of the Presentation material

for EC presentation.

Complied

The consultant is NABET accredited and details

of the same are described in Chapter – 10 of the

EIA report.

ix. TORs’ prescribed by the Expert Appraisal

Committee (Industry) shall be considered Complied


for preparation of EIA-EMP report for the

project in addition to all the relevant

information as per the ‘Generic Structure

of EIA’ given in Appendix III and IIIA in

the EIA

Notification, 2006. Where the documents

provided are in a language other than

English, an English translation shall be

provided. The draft EIA-EMP report shall

be submitted to the State Pollution Control

Board of the concerned State for conduct of

Public Hearing. The SPCB shall conduct

the Public Hearing/public consultation,

district-wise, as per the provisions of EIA

notification, 2006. The Public Hearing

shall be chaired by an Officer not below

the rank of Additional District Magistrate.

The issues raised in the Public Hearing and

during the consultation process and the

commitments made by the project

proponent on the same shall be included

separately in EIA-EMP Report in a

separate chapter and summarized in a

tabular chart with financial budget (capital

and revenue) along with time-schedule of

implementation for complying with the

commitments made. The final EIA report

shall be submitted to the Ministry for

obtaining environmental clearance.

ADDITIONAL TORS FOR INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT

1. Public hearing is exempted for the proposal Agreed

2. Compliance report from RO for all ECs granted

so far should be submitted.

Six monthly compliance report is regularly

submitted. Last six monthly report for Oct 2015

to March 2016 has been submitted.

HINDALCO INDUSTRIES LIMITED (UNIT: BIRLA COPPER) PROPOSED EXPANSION PROJECT OF CONTINUOUS CAST COPPER ROD

Eco Chem Sales & Services I | P a g e

Contents

CHAPTER-1 ............................................................................................................................... 14

INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 14

1.1 ABOUT THE PROJECT PROPONENT .......................................................................................................................... 14

1.2 PROJECT DETAILS ..................................................................................................................................................... 16

1.2.1 PROJECT BRIEF ................................................................................................................................................... 16

1.2.2 DETAILS OF THE PROJECT SITE ........................................................................................................................... 16

1.3 JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT ............................................................................................................................... 18

1.4 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK & NEED OF EIA STUDY ................................................................................................. 19

1.5 SCOPE & OBJECTIVES OF THE EIA STUDY.................................................................................................................. 20

1.6 THE EIA CYCLE AND PROCEDURES ........................................................................................................................... 22

1.6.1 SCREENING ......................................................................................................................................................... 22

1.6.2 SCOPING ............................................................................................................................................................. 22

1.6.3 BASELINE DATA .................................................................................................................................................. 22

1.6.4 IMPACT PREDICTION .......................................................................................................................................... 24

1.6.5 MITIGATION MEASURES AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ........................................................... 24

1.6.6 RISK ASSESSMENT & DISASTER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................ 24

1.7 EIA REVIEW & APPLICATION FOR EC ......................................................................................................................... 24

1.8 STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT ...................................................................................................................................... 25

CHAPTER-2 ............................................................................................................................... 28

PROJECT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 28

2.1 NEED OF THE PROJECT .............................................................................................................................................. 28

2.2 PROJECT LOCATION ................................................................................................................................................... 30

2.2.1 SITE SELECTION CRITERIA ................................................................................................................................... 31

2.2.2 ALTERNATIVE SITE SELECTION ........................................................................................................................... 31

2.2.3 CONNECTIVITY AND SALIENT FEATURES OF THE PROJECT SITE ........................................................................ 31

2.3.4 SALIENT FEATURES OF THE PROJECT SITE.......................................................................................................... 36

2.3 PROJECT LOCATION DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................ 37

2.3.1 DESCRIPTION OF LAND USE, GEOLOGY, TOPOGRAPHY ..................................................................................... 37

2.3.2 DESCRIPTION OF EXISTING INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES ................................................................................. 44


Eco Chem Sales & Services II | P a g e

2.4 RESOURCES REQUIREMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 46

2.4.1 WATER REQUIREMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 46

2.4.2 POWER REQUIREMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 47

2.4.3 LAND REQUIREMENT ......................................................................................................................................... 48

2.4.4 MANPOWER REQUIREMENT .............................................................................................................................. 48

2.4.5 PROJECT COST BREAKUP .................................................................................................................................... 49

2.5 PRODUCTS & RAW MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................. 49

2.5.1 RAW MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 50

2.5.1.1 RAW MATERIALS TRANSPORTATION .............................................................................................................. 50

2.5.2 DETAILS OF PRODUCT ........................................................................................................................................ 51

2.6 PLANT & MACHINERIES ............................................................................................................................................. 54

2.7 PROCESS DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................. 57

2.8 POLLUTION POTENTIAL AND ITS CONTROL MEASURES ........................................................................................... 62

2.8.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................................................ 62

2.8.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 63

2.8.3 HAZARDOUS/SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT...................................................................................................... 65

2.8.4 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................................................................ 65

2.8.5 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT..................................................................................................................................... 66

2.9 HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT.......................................................................................................................... 67

2.10 GREEN BELT ............................................................................................................................................................. 67

CHAPTER-3 ............................................................................................................................... 69

BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS .............................................................................. 69

3.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 69

3.2 METHODOLOGY ........................................................................................................................................................ 72

3.2.1 STUDY PERIOD AND FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING ............................................................................................... 72

3.2.2 METHOD OF ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLING & ANALYSIS ................................................................................... 73

3.3 MICROMETEOROLOGY .............................................................................................................................................. 74

3.3.1 SOURCE OF METEOROLOGICAL DATA ............................................................................................................... 74

3.3.2 TEMPERATURE ................................................................................................................................................... 74

3.3.3 HUMIDITY ........................................................................................................................................................... 76

3.4.4 WIND VELOCITY.................................................................................................................................................. 78


Eco Chem Sales & Services III | P a g e

3.3.5 WIND ROSE ........................................................................................................................................................ 79

3.3.6 INTERPRETATION OF MICROMETROLOGICAL DATA .......................................................................................... 81

3.4 AIR ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................................................... 81

3.4.1 SELECTION OF SAMPLING LOCATIONS ............................................................................................................... 81

3.4.2 FREQUENCY AND PARAMETERS FOR SAMPLING ............................................................................................... 83

3.4.3 INSTRUMENT FOR SAMPLING ............................................................................................................................ 83

3.4.4 QUALITY OF AMBIENT AIR ................................................................................................................................. 83

3.4.5 SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY ............................................................................................................... 88

3.4.6 INTERPRETATION OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY DATA .......................................................................................... 88

3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................................................... 89

3.5.1 SOURCES OF NOISE POLLUTION......................................................................................................................... 89

3.5.2 NOISE LEVEL IN THE STUDY AREA ...................................................................................................................... 89

3.5.3 INTERPRETATION OF NOISE DATA ..................................................................................................................... 93

3.6 LAND ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................................................ 93

3.6.1 LAND USE PATTERN ........................................................................................................................................... 93

3.7 SOIL QUALITY ............................................................................................................................................................ 97

3.7.1 SUMMARY OF SOIL QUALITY ............................................................................................................................. 99

3.7.2 INTERPRETATION OF SOIL DATA ........................................................................................................................ 99

3.8 WATER ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................................................................... 100

3.8.1 RECONNAISSANCE ............................................................................................................................................ 100

3.8.2 WATER QUALITY ............................................................................................................................................... 100

3.8.4 GROUND WATER RESOURCES .......................................................................................................................... 101

3.8.5 SUMMARY OF GROUND WATER QUALITY ....................................................................................................... 105

3.8.6 INTERPRETATIONOF GROUND WATER QUALITY DATA ................................................................................... 106

3.8.7 SURFACE WATER .............................................................................................................................................. 107

3.8.8 SUMMARY OF SURFACE WATER QUALITY ....................................................................................................... 112

3.8.9 INTERPRETATION OF SURFACE WATER QUALITY DATA ................................................................................... 112

3.8.10 MARINE WATER ............................................................................................................................................. 113

3.8.11 SUMMARY OF MARINE WATER QUALITY ...................................................................................................... 116

3.8.12 INTERPRETATION OF MARINE WATER QUALITY DATA .................................................................................. 116

3.9 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY .................................................................................................................................. 116

3.9.1 METHODOLOGY ADOPTED FOR THE STUDY OF FLORA & FAUNA ................................................................... 117


Eco Chem Sales & Services IV | P a g e

3.10 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT ....................................................................................................................... 125

3.10.1 SOCIO-ECONOMIC SURVEY METHODOLOGY ................................................................................................. 125

3.10.2 DEMOGRAPHY ................................................................................................................................................ 126

3.10.3 POPULATION DENSITY ................................................................................................................................... 126

3.10.4 SEX RATIO ....................................................................................................................................................... 126

3.10.5 LITERACY RATE ............................................................................................................................................... 127

3.10.6 ECONOMIC ASPECTS ...................................................................................................................................... 128

3.10.6 INTERPRETATION OF SOCIO ECONOMIC DATA: ............................................................................................ 130

CHAPTER-4 ............................................................................................................................. 131

IMPACT PREDICTION & MITIGATION MEASURES ....................................................... 131

4.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 131

4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL FACETS & PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................ 131

4.3 TYPES & NATURE OF IMPACTS CONSIDERED .......................................................................................................... 133

4.4 CONSIDERATION OF PROJECT ACTIVITIES & COMPONENTS .................................................................................. 134

4.5 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES .................................................................. 137

4.5.1 LAND ENVIRONMENT ....................................................................................................................................... 137

4.5.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT .......................................................................................................................................... 139

4.5.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................................................... 151

4.5.4 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 155

4.5.5 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................................ 157

4.5.6 SOCIO ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................................. 158

4.5.7 IMPACTS ON SAFETY & HEALTH ....................................................................................................................... 159

4.5.8 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PLAN: ........................................................................................................................ 162

4.6 ENERGY CONSERVATION ......................................................................................................................................... 164

4.7 MATRIX ANALYSIS FOR IMPACT ASSESSMENT ........................................................................................................ 164

CHAPTER-5 ............................................................................................................................. 172

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN .......................................................................... 172

5.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN ................................................................................................................... 172

5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS TO BE MONITORED .................................................................................................... 173

5.2.1 Ambient Air Quality .......................................................................................................................................... 174

5.3.2 Plant Stack Emissions Monitoring .................................................................................................................... 174


Eco Chem Sales & Services V | P a g e

5.3.3 Effluent Quality ................................................................................................................................................ 175

5.3.5 Solid / Hazardous Waste Generation & Utilization .......................................................................................... 175

5.3.6 Green Belt Development ................................................................................................................................. 175

5.3.7 House Keeping ................................................................................................................................................. 176

5.3.8 Occupational Health and Safety ....................................................................................................................... 176

5.3 MONITORING METHODOLOGIES ........................................................................................................................... 176

5.3.9 Socio-Economic Development ......................................................................................................................... 177

5.4 MONITORING PARAMETERS & FREQUENCY ........................................................................................................... 177

5.5 PROGRESS MONITORING AND REPORTING ARRANGEMENTS ............................................................................... 178

5.6 LABORATORY FACILITIES ......................................................................................................................................... 179

5.7 DOCUMENTATION & RECORDS ............................................................................................................................... 180

5.8 BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR EMS .......................................................................................................................... 180

CHAPTER-6 ............................................................................................................................. 182

ADDITIONAL STUDIES ......................................................................................................... 182

6.0 SCOPE OF THIS STUDY ............................................................................................................................................. 182

6.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 184

6.2 OBJECTIVES OF RISK ASSESSMENT .......................................................................................................................... 184

6.3 BASIC EMERGENCY CONSIDERATIONS AT HINDALCO ............................................................................................ 185

6.3.1 PLANT HAZARDS: .............................................................................................................................................. 185

6.3.2 NATURAL CALAMITIES ...................................................................................................................................... 196

6.4 EMERGENCY RESPONSE MANAGEMENT PLAN ....................................................................................................... 198

6.5 NEED OF AN EMERGENCY RESPONSE MANAGEMENT PLAN .................................................................................. 199

6.6 APPROACH TO THE STUDY ...................................................................................................................................... 200

6.6.1 OBJECTIVES OF THE ERMP ............................................................................................................................... 200

6.6.2 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ERMP .................................................................................................. 200

6.7 ON SITE EMERGENCY PLAN ..................................................................................................................................... 201

6.7.1 SCOPE OF THE PLAN ......................................................................................................................................... 202

6.7.2 MODE OF EMERGENCIES ................................................................................................................................. 202

6.7.3 BASIC STRUCTURE ............................................................................................................................................ 204

6.7.4 RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................................................................. 205

6.8 OFF SITE EMERGENCY PLAN .................................................................................................................................... 217


Eco Chem Sales & Services VI | P a g e

6.8.1 ROLE OF EXTERNAL AGENCIES DURING EMERGENCY: .................................................................................... 217

6.9 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY PLAN ............................................................................................................... 223

CHAPTER-7 ............................................................................................................................. 226

PROJECT BENEFITS .............................................................................................................. 226

7.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 226

7.2 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL ...................................................................................................................................... 226

7.2.1 SKILLED AND SEMI-SKILLED .............................................................................................................................. 226

7.2.2 UN-SKILLED....................................................................................................................................................... 227

7.3 CSR ACTIVITIES ........................................................................................................................................................ 227

7.3.1 PAST CSR ACTIVITIES ........................................................................................................................................ 227

7.3.2 FUTURE CSR PLANS .......................................................................................................................................... 232

CHAPTER-8 ............................................................................................................................. 233

ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN ............................................................................ 233

8.1 COMPONENTS OF AN EMS...................................................................................................................................... 233

8.2 SUMMARY OF ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS ..................................................................................... 234

8.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ................................................................................................................ 235

8.3.1 LAND ENVIRONMENT & SOLID/HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT ............................................................ 235

8.3.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................ 236

8.3.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................... 238

8.3.4 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................................ 246

8.3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 247

8.3.6 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH, SAFETY & HOUSE KEEPING ..................................................................................... 249

8.4 CLEANER PRODUCTION PRACTICES ........................................................................................................................ 251

8.4.1 CONSERVATION OF WATER ............................................................................................................................. 252

8.4.2 CONSERVATION OF ENERGY ............................................................................................................................ 252

8.5 GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN .......................................................................................................................... 256

8.6 DRAINAGE & RAINWATER HARVESTING PLAN ....................................................................................................... 262

8.7 BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR EMS: ......................................................................................................................... 264

8.8 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL: .................................................................................................................... 265

8.9 SOCIAL WELFARE & UPLIFTMENT PLAN .................................................................................................................. 266

CHAPTER-9 ............................................................................................................................. 269


Eco Chem Sales & Services VII | P a g e

SUMMARY & CONCLUSION ............................................................................................... 269

9.1 PROJECT LOCATION ................................................................................................................................................. 269

9.1.1 PROJECT SITE .................................................................................................................................................... 269

9.1.2 SALIENT FEATURES OF THE PROJECT SITE........................................................................................................ 270

9.3 RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................... 271

9.4 RAW MATERIAL REQUIREMENT .............................................................................................................................. 272

9.7 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 273

9.8 IMPACTING ACTIVITIES ........................................................................................................................................... 278

9.9 IMPACT PREDICTION ............................................................................................................................................... 279

9.10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN .............................................................................................................. 281

9.10.1 EMP FOR WATER MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................................. 281

9.10.2 EMP for Air Management .............................................................................................................................. 283

9.10.3 EMP for Waste Management ......................................................................................................................... 285

9.10.4 EMP for Noise Control.................................................................................................................................... 286

9.11 ADDITIONAL STUDIES ............................................................................................................................................ 287

9.10.1 RISK ASSESSMENT .......................................................................................................................................... 287

9.10.2 DISASTER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................................................................................................ 287

9.12 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH, SAFETY & HOUSEKEEPING ........................................................................................... 288

9.13 GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN ........................................................................................................................ 289

9.14 RAINWATER HARVESTING PLAN ........................................................................................................................... 290

9.15 BUDGETARY PROVISIONS FOR EMS: ..................................................................................................................... 290

9.16 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL ............................................................................................................... 291

9.18 SOCIAL WELFARE & UPLIFTMENT PLAN ................................................................................................................ 292

9.18 CONCLUSION ......................................................................................................................................................... 293

CHAPTER – 10 ......................................................................................................................... 294

DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED .................................................................... 294

10.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 294

10.1.1 GROUP COMPANIES & THEIR ACTIVITIES ................................................................................. 294

10.1.2 VISION & MISSION ............................................................................................................................ 296

10.1.3 KEY PERSONNEL .............................................................................................................................. 297

10.2 KEY TECHNICAL SERVICES ..................................................................................................................................... 298


Eco Chem Sales & Services VIII | P a g e

10.2.1 CERTIFICATES ................................................................................................................................... 299

10.2.2 NABET Approval ................................................................................................................................. 299

List of Figure

Figure No. 1.1 – Location of the proposed project site ...................................................................................................... 17

Figure No 2.1: Google Map ................................................................................................................................................. 32

Figure No 2.2: Proposed Expansion Area ............................................................................................................................ 33

Figure No 2.3: Plant Layout ................................................................................................................................................. 34

Figure No 2.4: Details of proposed Expansion .................................................................................................................... 35

Figure no. 3.1.1: Map showing the study region with locations for ambient air, noise & soil...etc. .................................. 70

Figure No 3.3.1 Graphical Presentation for month wise Temperature Variation .............................................................. 76

Figure No 3.3.2 Graphical Presentation for month wise Humidity Variation ..................................................................... 78

Figure No.3.3.3 Wind rose diagram (Mar’16-May’16) ........................................................................................................ 80

Figure No.3.4.1 Ambient Air Monitoring Photographs ....................................................................................................... 82

Figure No. 3.4.2 PM10 Conc. Variation in study Area .......................................................................................................... 86

Figure No. 3.4.3 PM2.5 Conc. Variation in Study Area ......................................................................................................... 86

Figure No.3.4.4 Variation in SO2 Conc. In study area ......................................................................................................... 87

Figure No.3.4.5 Variation in NOx Conc. In study area ......................................................................................................... 87

Figure No. 3.5.1 Noise Monitoring Photographs ................................................................................................................ 90

Figure No.3.5.2 Variation in Noise Level during day time .................................................................................................. 92

Figure No. 3.5.3 Variation in Noise Level during night time ............................................................................................... 92

Figure No.3.6.1: Land Use Map ........................................................................................................................................... 96

Figure No.3.7.1: Soil Sampling Photographs ....................................................................................................................... 97

Figure No. 3.8.1: Map showing the study region with locations for Ground Water ........................................................ 102

Figure No 3.8.2Ground Water Sampling Photographs ..................................................................................................... 103

Figure No.3.8.3Map showing the locations for Surface water ......................................................................................... 108

Figure No.3.8.4 Surface water sampling Photographs ..................................................................................................... 109

Figure No 4.1: Isopleths for Concentration of SPM (E) ..................................................................................................... 143

Figure No 4.2: Isopleths for Concentration of SOx (E) ...................................................................................................... 144

Figure No 4.3: Isopleths for Concentration of NOx ( E) .................................................................................................... 145

Figure No 4.4: Isopleths for Concentration of SPM (P) ..................................................................................................... 146

Figure No 4.5: Isopleths for Concentration of SOx (P) ...................................................................................................... 147

Figure No 4.6: Isopleths for Concentration of NOx (P) ..................................................................................................... 148

Figure No 4.7: WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................................... 154

FIGURE 8.1: PLANT LAYOUT SHOWING GREENBELT ......................................................................................................... 263


Eco Chem Sales & Services IX | P a g e

List of Table

Table No: 1.1 – Structure of EIA report ............................................................................................................................... 25

Table No: 2.1- Salient Features ........................................................................................................................................... 36

Table No: 2.2- Nearby Industries ........................................................................................................................................ 37

Table No – 2.8(A): Details of Equipments for the existing CCR plant ............................................................................ 54

Table No – 2.8(B): Details of equipment for the CCR plant-Proposed Expansion ........................................................ 55

Table No.3.1.1 Environment Monitoring Locations in the study region ............................................................................ 70

Table 3.1.2: Environmental Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 71

Table No 3.2.1: Frequency of Environmental Monitoring .................................................................................................. 72

Table No.3.2.2: Method of Environmental Sampling & Analysis ........................................................................................ 73

Table No.3.3.1 Details of Temperature (°C) Nr. Project site (Mar’16 to May’16) .............................................................. 75

Table No 3.3.2: Details of Humidity (%) Nr. Project site (Mar’16- May’16) ........................................................................ 76

Table No.3.3.3 Details of Wind speed Nr. Project site (Mar’16- May’16) .......................................................................... 78

Table No 3.4.1 Details of Analysis Method ......................................................................................................................... 83

Table No.3.4.2 Percentile Value of PM10 & PM2.5 (Mar’16-May’16).................................................................................... 84

Table No. 3.4.3 Percentile Value of SO2 & NOx (Mar’16-May’16) ..................................................................................... 84

Table No3.4.4 Percentile Value of NH3& CO (Mar’16-May’16) .......................................................................................... 85

Table No.3.4.5 Ambient Air Quality Standards ................................................................................................................... 88

Table No 3.5.1 Noise Monitoring Report during day time (Mar’16-May’16) ..................................................................... 90

Table No 3.5.2 Noise Monitoring Report during night time (Mar’16-May’16) ................................................................... 91

Table No 3.5.3: Noise Level Standards ................................................................................................................................ 93

Table No. 3.6.1 Land Use Detail .......................................................................................................................................... 95

Table No.3.7.1: Results of Soil Samples (Mar’16 to May’16) .............................................................................................. 98

Table No.3.7.2: Soil Texture analysis (Mar’16 to May’16) .................................................................................................. 98

Table No. 3.8.1 Details of Ground Water sampling locations ........................................................................................... 102

Table No. 3.8.2 Ground water Analysis Report (Mar’16 – May’16) ................................................................................. 104

Table No.3.8.3 Drinking Water Specification: IS: 10500, 1992(Reaffirmed 2012) ............................................................ 105

Table No. 3.8.4 Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations .......................................................................................... 108

Table No.3.8.6 Bacteriological Analysis of surface Water (Mar’16– May’16) .................................................................. 111

Table No.3.8.7 Inland Surface Water Classification (CPCB Standards) ............................................................................. 111

Table No. 4.1: Construction Phase: Matrix Evaluation without mitigation measures ...................................................... 167

Table No 4.2: Construction Phase: Matrix Evaluation with mitigation measures ............................................................ 168

Table No 4.3: Operation Phase: Matrix Evaluation without mitigation measures ........................................................... 169

Table No 4.4: Operation Phase: Matrix Evaluation with mitigation measures ................................................................ 170

Table No 5.2: Method Adopted for Environmental Sampling/analysis ............................................................................ 176

Table 5.1: Post Project Environmental Monitoring Programme ...................................................................................... 177

Table 5.3: Reporting System for Environmental Monitoring Plan .................................................................................... 178

Table No: 8.3.1 Wastewater Quality ................................................................................................................................. 239

Table No: 8.4.1 Details of Energy Saving for the year 2016 .............................................................................................. 253


Eco Chem Sales & Services X | P a g e

Table No. 8.4.2 Energy conservation measures by Energy Cell Team (2015-16) ............................................................. 254

Table No: 8.4.3 CAPEX Approved – spillover for the year 2015........................................................................................ 255

Table No. 8.4.4 Existing Trees in the premises ................................................................................................................. 258

Table No 9.1: Frequency of Environmental Monitoring ................................................................................................... 273

Table No.9.2: Method of Environmental Sampling & Analysis ......................................................................................... 274

Table No 9.3: Baseline Status of the study area: .............................................................................................................. 275


Eco Chem Sales & Services XI | P a g e

List of Annexures

Annexure-1 Environmental Clearance ............................................................................................................................. 302

Annexure-2 CC&A Copy .................................................................................................................................................... 303

Annexure-3 Land Documents ........................................................................................................................................... 304

Annexure-4 Water Withdrawal Permission .................................................................................................................... 305

Annexure-5 Gazette Notification ..................................................................................................................................... 306

Annexure-6 Mutual Aid Agreement ................................................................................................................................ 307

Annexure-7 EHS Policy ..................................................................................................................................................... 308

Annexure-8 Health record ................................................................................................................................................ 309

Annexure-9 CC&A Compliance......................................................................................................................................... 310

Annexure-10 EC Compliance ............................................................................................................................................ 311


Eco Chem Sales & Services XII | P a g e

List of Abbreviation

1. HIL– Hindalco Industries Limited

2. CCR – Continues cast Road Plant

3. GPCB – Gujarat Pollution Control Board

4. EC – Environmental Clearance

5. ISO– International organization for standardization

6. OSHAS- Occupation Health and Safety management System

7. EIA – Environmental Impact Assessment

8. CC&A – Consolidated Consent & Authorization

9. EMP – Environmental Management Plan

10. IMD –Indian Meteorological Department

11. HSD – High Speed Diesel

12. SPM – Suspended Particulate Matter & RSPM – Resiparable Suspended Particulate Matter

13. SO2 – Sulphur Dioxide

14. NOx – Oxides of Nitrogen

15. BOD – Biological Oxygen Demand

16. COD – Chemical Oxygen Demand

17. APHA – American Public Health Association

18. EQS- Environmental quality Score

19. ECC – Emergency Control Center

20. MPN – Most Probable Number

21. GoI - Government Of India

22. GIDC - Gujarat Industrial Development Corporation

23. MTPA - Metric Tonne Per Annum

24. QC- Quality Control

25. QA – Quality Assurance


Eco Chem Sales & Services XIII | P a g e

26. WBD - Water balance Diagram

27. EMC – Environmental Management Cell

28. LU-Land Use

29. CSR-Corporate Social Responsibility

30. GLC- Ground Level Concentration

31. RWH-Rain Water Harvesting

32. RA-Risk Assessment

33. DMP-Disaster Management Plan

34. KLD-Kilo liter per day

35. PPE- Personnel Protective Equipments

36. TMT-Thermo Mechanically Treated steel

37. HSD- High Speed Diesel

38. APC-Air Pollution Control Device

39. FAE – Functional Area Expert


Eco Chem Sales & Services 14 | P a g e

CHAPTER-1

INTRODUCTION

India boasts of one of the largest metallurgical industries in the world and it is known to be the founder of

World Metallurgical Industry. This is due to the presence of several Iron and Steel industries, Copper

smelters and other metallurgical industries in India and its massive ore deposits. In recent past, the industry

has performed really well and provided an impetus to the market. It has also led to business opportunities

and growth in major sectors like infrastructure, power, manufacturing, automobiles, environment, defense,

R&D, transport, energy, oil and gas, telecom etc.

The Metallurgical Industry is one of India‘s foothold not just for the manufacturing sector but also for the

country‘s economy. A whole range of Industries such as automobiles & components, electrical appliance &

products, infrastructure, building & construction, power, agriculture, telecom, railways, aviation,

engineering, oil and gas, defense, R&D, transport and many more are directly dependent on it.

India's rapid economic growth and soaring demand by sectors like infrastructure, electrical equipment, Wire

and cable industries, real estate and automobiles, at home and abroad, has put Indian Metallurgical industry

on the global map

1.1 ABOUT THE PROJECT PROPONENT

The Aditya Birla group is one of India‘s largest business houses. Global in vision with Indian values, the

group is driven by performance ethics, pegged on value creation for its multiple stake holders. Hindalco

Industries Limited is a flagship company of the Aditya Birla Group, which is India‘s second largest business

house. Anchored in a deeply held set of values, Aditya Birla Group‘s avowed mission is to deliver value for

the shareholders, customers, employees and society at large. It ranks amongst India‘s top 10 companies in

terms of market capitalization.

Hindalco embarked on its journey in 1958. Its first real contribution to the vision of an industrial India

occurred four years after its establishment, when the visionary late Mr. GD Birla set up India's first

integrated aluminium facility at Renukoot, in the eastern fringe of Uttar Pradesh, India. It was backed by a

captive thermal power plant at Renusagar in 1967. Hindalco attained a leadership position in the aluminium

industry under the dynamic leadership of the late Mr. Aditya Vikram Birla — a formidable force in the

Indian industry. Adding to the milestones, through the vision and guidance of Mr. Kumar Mangalam Birla,

the Group Chairman that the business segments of aluminium and copper are consolidated to make

Hindalco the non-ferrous metals‘ powerhouse today. This was achieved in parts by expanding through



mergers and acquisitions with companies such as Indal and Birla Copper. The group has received several

noteworthy accolades and recognitions for its noteworthy contribution in the Indian economy.

Over the years, Hindalco has grown into a major vertically integrated aluminium company in the country

and holds a place among the largest primary producers of aluminium in Asia. Its copper smelter is today one

of the world's largest custom smelter at a single location. In 2007, the landmark acquisition of Novelis Inc.,

the world's largest aluminium rolling company, placed Hindalco's footprint across the globe, securing it a

rank amongst the top five global aluminium majors.

Birla copper a unit of Hindalco Industries Limited (earlier known as Indo Gulf Corporation Ltd.) has set up

a mega copper smelting and refining complex in the year 1997 at village Lakhigam and at Dahej, Taluka –

Vagra, District – Bharuch in Gujarat. The industry now proposes an expansion of Continuous Cast Copper

Rod Plant in the existing premises of this unit.

The unit is committed to maintain highest standards in quality of the product, safety and environment. The

unit has been accredited with ISO 14001 certification for environmental management system and ISO 9001

certification for its quality system. The plant has been operating under statutory consents and clearances

from Gujarat Pollution Control Board (GPCB) and Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change

(MoEFCC). The unit has also laid down its own Health & Safety policy, Public Liability Insurance,

Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) and holds licenses under Factory Act and Indian Explosives Act.

The plant manufactures world class LME grade copper cathode, continuous cast copper rod and precious

metals. Apart from copper products, Sulphuric Acid, Phosphoric Acid and DAP/NPK fertilizers are also

manufactured in this plant. To meet its infrastructure requirement the plant has its own power plants, oxygen

plants, jetty and water reservoir. The unit has adopted latest technology supplied by renowned and expert

international agencies.



1.2 PROJECT DETAILS

1.2.1 PROJECT BRIEF

Hindalco Industries Limited (Unit: Birla Copper) proposes to expand Continuous Cast Copper Rod from

240000 TPA to 484000 TPA by setting up of a new Continuous Cast Copper Rod plant of 244000 TPA

capacity in the existing Copper Smelter Complex. Hindalco Industries Limited located at GIDC Industrial

area, Survey No. 29 to 39,101,104 to 110,112 to 115,117 to 122 of village Dahej (Plot No. 2 of Dahej

GIDC) and Survey No 646 to 671, 679, 685, 732 to 742, 744 to 752 of Village: Lakhigam, Taluka: Vagra,

Dist: Bharuch, Gujarat. Hindalco Industries Limited envisages to use a state of art technology, adopting

modernized machineries/equipment and novel process technologies. The unit has obtained CC&A of GPCB

Vide letter No: AWH-62117, 11/06/2014, which is valid upto 02/03/2020. Unit has also obtained

Environmental Clearance from Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change (MoEFCC), New

Delhi.

1.2.2 DETAILS OF THE PROJECT SITE

The proposed expansion project of Hindalco Industries Limited will be carried out at the existing Copper

Smelter Complex located at about 21042‘ N Latitude & 72

033‘E Longitude in Dahej, District: Bharuch.

Total area under possession of Birla Copper is 327 Ha out of which 4,680 sq.meter area will be utilized for

proposed expansion from existing spare land. The site is well connected by rail and road. The location of the

proposed project is attached as Figure No: 1.1.

Nearest railway station from project site is Bharuch which is approximately 55 km towards East. The site is

connected by road with NH-8 which is around 46 km towards East site from the project site. State highway

No-6 is 5.5 km away from the project site. The nearest town from project site is Dahej, which is located

about 4.8 km away. Dahej is the largest industrial estate with many small scale & medium scale industries.

Four corners Latitudes and Longitudes of the proposed project are as under:

Project Co-ordinate

Corner Latitude Longitude

A 21o 42‘10.22‖ N 72

o 32‘42.28‖ E

B 21o 42‘56.89‖ N 72

o 32‘10.48‖ E

C 21o 41‘50.55‖ N 72

o 33‘00.90‖ E

D 21o 42‘06.97‖ N 72

o 33‘05.92‖ E



Figure No. 1.1 – Location of the proposed project site



1.3 JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT

The proposed project provides a potential growth opportunity for the already running business of the

company. The company is engaged in the business of manufacturing of ―Continuous Cast Copper Rods‖.

Hindalco‘s Copper division operates one of the largest single location custom copper smelters in the world.

The Custom Smelter complex at Dahej in state of Gujarat in the west coast of India houses copper smelters,

refineries, rod plants, captive power plant, a jetty and other utilities.

Hindalco produces copper cathodes, continuous cast copper rods in various sizes and also precious metals

like Gold and Silver. The co-product Sulphuric acid is also utilized to produce Phosphoric acid and

Fertilizers like Di-Ammonium Phosphate (DAP). Hindalco‘s copper cathodes are known for high purity and

consistent quality.

Hindalco Industries Limited-Unit Birla Copper is an ISO 9001, 14001 and OSHAS 18001 certified

company, registered on the London Metal Exchange as Grade-A copper brand and certified as a Star

Trading House having NABL accredited labs for chemical, mechanical and electrical testing.

Hindalco products and applications cater to various markets and industrial and commercial requirements

like:

Agrochemicals

Automotive and transport

Consumer durables

Electrical equipment

Railways

Wire and cable industry

Demand Supply Gap

The products have very high specific demand in various markets mentioned above. As per CRU forecast,

the demand of refined copper in the ASIAN region has increased by 7.4 % in the year 2015 due to a stronger

domestic demand. Also, there is a greater import potential for the copper industry.

Global refined copper consumption over the year 2014-19 is projected to grow at CAGR of 2.6%. Chinese

consumption is estimated to be 465 of the global consumption and 33% of global production in 2015. The

major demand drivers of world copper consumption in coming years is based on the growth trend of

Industrial production, Automobile and Construction sector.

http://www.hindalco.com/our-businesses/fertilisers

http://www.hindalco.com/industries/copper/automotive-Industry

http://www.hindalco.com/industries/copper/consumer-durables

http://www.hindalco.com/industries/copper/electrical-equipment

http://www.hindalco.com/industries/copper/railways

http://www.hindalco.com/industries/copper/wire-and-cable-industry



Global consumption forecast of Copper Wire Rod (CCR) is expected to be about 3% CAGR from 2013 to

2019. Consumption growth rate is expected to be stable in regions such as Asia (other than China), South

Africa and America.

1.4 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK & NEED OF EIA STUDY

Government of India, as per its policy, has given emphasis on Sustainable Development. It supports the

industrial growth and along with it, environmental protection has also been made the integrated criteria for

this support. In line with this policy, Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MoEFCC) has

defined elaborated ‗Environmental Clearance‘ (EC) framework under the Environmental Protection Act,

1986 (Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2006) for establishing/expanding and

industry/development project. As per the EIA notification, prior environmental clearance is required for

certain categories of the projects. The EC process takes into consideration project details, baseline

environmental conditions, environmental impact assessment and proposed mitigation measures in sustaining

environmental equilibrium.

The applicability of the S. O. 1533 for the proposed project was explored by considering different

possibilities and provisions described in the said notification. Considering the products and project location

of the proposed project, it is noticed that the proposed expansion falls under the item no. 3(a) i.e.

Metallurgical Industries (ferrous & non-ferrous) and under Category A of EIA notification so, EC

application has also been submitted to MoEFCC for accord of EC. Hence EIA study is required to carry out

as per TORs awarded by MoEFCC, Delhi. Public hearing is not applicable as proposed expansion will be

carried out in notified GIDC industrial estate. Notification is attached as Annexure-5.

EIA report has been prepared by NABET accredited consultant, Eco Chem Sales & Services and analysis

has been carried out by own in-house NABL approved laboratory. EIA has been prepared as per ToRs

awarded by MoEFCC and EIA guidelines. A mitigation plan has been prepared and a detailed

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is drawn to effectively mitigate or minimize potentially adverse

environmental impacts on environment due to the proposed expansion project. The details are presented in

the subsequent chapters.

REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

The major acts & rules applicable to the project are:

Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 as amended timely, and the rules thereunder;

The Environmental Protection Act, 1986 as amended timely, and the rules thereunder;

EIA Notification, 2006 (as amended timely);



The Factories Acts, 1948 and the rules there under

The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991, as amended 1992 and the rules thereunder

1.5 SCOPE & OBJECTIVES OF THE EIA STUDY

This EIA Report is prepared in concurrence with the ToRs given by the MoEFCC, New Delhi. The scope of

study includes detailed characteristics of environmental components. For the purpose of environmental

assessment, the villages in the surrounding 10 km area have been surveyed and relevant data has been

collected.

The objectives of this EIA are:

To identify and describe the elements of the environment likely to be affected by the expansion of the

project, and/or likely to cause impacts upon both the natural and man-made environment.

To describe the project and associated works together along with the requirements.

To identify and quantify any environmental impacts associated with the expansion project and thereby

recommend appropriate mitigation measures.

To identify existing landscape and visual quality in the study area so as to evaluate the landscape and

visual impacts of the proposed expansion project.

To prepare an EMP to include most feasible EMS for pollution control of parameters of air, water, soil,

noise, etc.

To propose mitigation measures to minimize pollution, environmental disturbance and nuisance during

construction and operation of the expansion.

To identify, assess and specify methods, measures and standards, to be included in the detailed design,

construction and operation of the project which are necessary to mitigate these impacts and reduce them

to allowable levels within established standards/guidelines.

To identify and justify the need for environmental monitoring to define the scope of the requirements

necessary. To ensure the implementation and the effectiveness of the environmental protection and

pollution control measures adopted.

To identify constraints associated with the mitigation measures recommended in this EIA.

To identify any additional studies necessary to fulfill the objectives required for the EIA study.



FLOWCHART OF EIA ACTIVITIES CARRIED OUT FOR EIA REPORT

EIA REPORT

PRELIMINARY SCAN OF PROPOSED PROJECT

PRELIMINARY SCAN OF EXISTING ENVIRONMENT

SELECT ENVIRONMENTAL INDICATORS

SELECT ENVIRONMENTAL INDICATORS

IMPACT EVALUATION (MODELLING)

FIELD SURVEYS AND SAMPLING

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

PROJECT INITIATION

PRELIMINARY SCAN OF EXISTING

ENVIRONMENT

RISK ASSESSMENT & DMP

ANALYSIS HAZARD & RISK

DESCRIBE ENV SETTING



1.6 THE EIA CYCLE AND PROCEDURES

The EIA process in India is made up of the following phases:

1.6.1 SCREENING

Screening is done to ascertain whether the project requires clearance as per the statutory notifications.

Screening Criteria are based upon the following:

Type of Development.

Location of Development

By proper screening of location & type of the project, it was concluded that the proposed expansion falls

under Item no. 3(a) – Category A of the EIA Notification – 2006, S.O. 1533. It was also observed that public

hearing is not applicable to the project as proposed expansion as it is not in Gazette Notified Industrial Area.

(Gazette Notification is attached as Annexure-5)

1.6.2 SCOPING

Scoping determines the content and extent of matters that should be covered in the environmental information

to be submitted to a competent authority or other decision making body. Scoping is carried out in close

association with the project proponent and the environmental consultant. The MoEFCC has published

guidelines for different sectors, which outline the significant issues to be addressed in the EIA studies. Scoping

determines the content and extent of matters that should be covered in the environmental information to be

submitted to a competent authority or other decision making body. During quantification of impacts, area was

also defined upto the extent wherever the probability of impacts may occur. The baseline data for different

components of the environment shall be monitored and then the likely changes in these on account of the

construction and operation of the proposed expansion project shall be predicted.

1.6.3 BASELINE DATA

Baseline data describes the existing environmental status of the identified study area. A baseline study

illustrates the original status of the environment in the area before any development work of the project is

carried out. The study serves the purpose of a base reference against which the changes due to implementation

of the project are measured.

The site-specific primary data is monitored for the identified parameters and supplemented by secondary data

if available. For the proposed project, baseline data have been collected for Air Environment, Land

Environment and Water Environment within 10 km radius. For this purpose, site surveys have been conducted

& data has been collected in log sheets by talking to local people, gram panchayat, local leaders, etc.



Air Environment

Existing status of ambient air quality has been carried out at 8 locations in the vicinity of the site for

parameters namely PM10, PM2.5, Sulphur dioxide (SO2) & Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) etc have been described.

Maximum numbers of sampling stations have been selected considering the prominent wind direction of the

region. Micrometeorological data were collected by using the wind monitor as per CPCB guideline which

was installed near project site. Micro-meteorological data like wind speed, wind direction, temperature,

relative humidity etc., have been collected for the period March 2016 to May 2016.

Noise Environment

Noise level monitoring has been carried out at 8 Nos. of selected locations for day and night time by noise

meter to assess the present scenario of noise environment.

Water Environment

Ground water samples have been selected from 5 Nos. of selected locations and Surface Water samples have

been collected from one location from surrounding villages within 10 km radius of the project site. Locations

for the study of existing water resources with respect to water quality. Physical, chemical and micro biological

parameters were analyzed to assess the water quality. Results have been compared with standards prescribed

by GPCB to assess the water quality.

Land Environment

Soil samples have been collected from 8 selected sites within the impact zone and analyzed for relevant

parameters like texture, pH, conductivity, ESP, Phosphate, Copper, Zinc, Chloride, Total Nitrogen,

Chromium, Nitrogen as Nitrate etc.

Land use data have been prepared by using Geocoded False Colour Composite scene of IRS-IC LISS III /

LISS IV images along with Survey of India (SOI) Topo-sheet. Land use pattern map has been prepared by

approved Functional area expert.

Ecology & Bio Diversity

Primary data for flora & fauna have been collected by in house Functional Area Expert by conducting primary

survey and site visit. Secondary Data of flora and fauna, which have been collected from various literatures

published by the forest department, has been verified by collected primary data.

Socio- Economic Environment

Primary data has been collected and generated by in-house FAE by conducting survey and

interaction/discussion with the local public. Secondary data has also been obtained from the Census 2011 for

comparing the data.



1.6.4 IMPACT PREDICTION

Environmental impact evaluation actually grows out of scoping and baseline study of the project. EIA assigns

various quantified values to different impacts affecting the project.

Impact prediction is a way of ‗mapping‘ the environmental consequences of the significant aspects of the

project and its alternatives. Environmental impacts can never be predicted with absolute certainty, thus all

possible factors and precautions are to be considered for reducing the degree of uncertainty.

For the proposed project, detailed impacts were predicted which are likely to occur during the construction and

operation phase for any change in physical, chemical, biological, cultural and/or socio-economic environment

that can be attributed to activities related to alternatives under study for meeting the project needs.

1.6.5 MITIGATION MEASURES AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

Efficient mitigation plan has been drawn up for the identified impacts due to proposed expansion and is

supplemented with an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to guide the proponent towards environmental

improvements.

1.6.6 RISK ASSESSMENT & DISASTER MANAGEMENT

EIA requires inclusion/coverage of all significant risks, hazards and their mitigation. Depending on nature,

location and scale of the project, report contains the following components:

Hazard identification taking recourse to hazard indices, inventory analysis, hazard probability, etc.

Consequence analysis of failures and accidents resulting in fire, explosion, hazardous releases, etc.

Assessment of risk on the basis of the necessary evaluations.

Preparation of an On-site/Off-site Emergency Plan and Disaster Management Plan.

1.7 EIA REVIEW & APPLICATION FOR EC

The EIA report prepared as per the TORs given by EAC, MoEFCC - New Delhi for the proposed expansion

project vide File no: J-11011/927/2008-IA II (I), Dated: 08/01/2016 shall be reviewed at different levels (From

Management to Technical Expert) and then necessary changes/modifications shall be made for imperative

version of EIA report for submission/further application. After careful review of all the details, the application

& report has been made for obtaining EC for the proposed expansion project.



1.8 STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT

The generic structure of the EIA report as per the guideline provided by MoEFCC is illustrated in the

following tabulated format.

Table No: 1.1 – Structure of EIA report

NO. EIA STRUCTURE CONTENTS

* Executive Summary

1 Introduction Purpose of the report

Identification of project & project proponent

Brief description of nature, size, location of the

project and its importance to the country, region

Scope of the study – details of regulatory scoping

carried out.

Importance & benefits of the project

Detail of EIA consultant including NABET

accreditation

2 Project Description Condensed description of those aspects of the project

(based on project feasibility study), likely to cause

environmental effects. Description contains the

details of the following:

o Type of project

o Need & Cost for the project

o Location details showing general location,

specific location, project boundary & project

site layout)

o Technology and process description

o Raw materials & Products details with capacity



o Resource requirements

o Project description including drawings showing

project layout, Geohydrology, Drainage pattern,

Flood details and components of project etc.

o Details of emission, effluent, hazardous waste

generation & their management.

o Description of mitigation measures incorporated

into the project to meet environmental

standards.

o Existing statutory clearances

3 Description of the

Environment

Study area, period, components & methodology.

Establishment of baseline for valued environmental

components, as identified in the scope.

Study Period: March 2016 to May 2016.

Base maps of all environmental components.

Frequency of monitoring

4 Anticipated Environmental

Impacts &

Mitigation Measures

Details of Investigated Environmental impacts due to

project location, possible accidents, project design,

project construction, regular operations.

Measures for minimizing and / or offsetting adverse

impacts identified.

Irreversible and Irretrievable commitments of

environmental components.

Assessment of significance of impacts (Criteria for

determining significance, Assigning significance)

Mitigation measures.

5 Environmental Monitoring

Program

Technical aspects of environmental monitoring for

the effectiveness of mitigation measures (incl.

Measurement methodologies, frequency, location,



data analysis, reporting schedules, emergency

procedures, budget & procurement schedules)

6 Additional Study: Risk

Assessment & Disaster

Management Plan

Hazard Identification

Risk Assessment & control/prevention Measures

Disaster Management

On-site & Off-site emergency plan

7 Project Benefits Detail of the Socio-economic & other tangible

benefits of the project.

8 Environment Management

Plan

Description of the administrative aspects of ensuring

that mitigation measures are implemented and their

effectiveness monitored, after approval of the

Clearance. The Chapter consist of:

o Mitigation measures for impacts

o Pollution Prevention Plan

o Greenbelt Development Plan

o Environment Management Cell

o Budgetary Provisions for EMS

9 Summary & Conclusion Description of brief of EIA report & Conclusion

10 Disclosure of Consultant

Engaged

Detail of the EIA Consultant



CHAPTER-2

PROJECT DESCRIPTION

Hindalco Industries Limited (Unit: Birla Copper) is an existing large - scale unit located in Dahej industrial

estate developed by Gujarat Industrial Development Corporation (GIDC) in Survey No. 29 to 39,101,104 to

110,112 to 115,117 to 122 of village Dahej (Plot No. 2 of Dahej GIDC) and Survey No 646 to 671, 679,

685, 732 to 742, 744 to 752 of Village: Lakhigam, Taluka: Vagra, Dist: Bharuch, Gujarat. The proponent

wishes to enhance the existing production capacity of Continuous Cast Copper Rod products.

Total plot area of the industry is 327 Ha and spare land of 4680 sq.meter shall be utilized for proposed

expansion & the total investment for the proposed expansion will be Rs. 240 Crores. As per the EIA

Notification, the proposed expansion project is covered under category-A & will be appraised at MoEFCC.

Unit has obtained Environmental Clearance for existing plant vide file No: J-11011/927/2008-IA-II(I)

Dated: 11/02/2009. Same is attached as Annexure-1. The unit has obtained CC&A of GPCB Vide letter

No: AWH-62117, 11/06/2014 and 07/10/2014, which is valid upto 02/03/2020 (Attached as Annexure-2).

2.1 NEED OF THE PROJECT

Copper is considered to be one of the important metals for the national economic development. India is the

one of the prominent copper producer with an annual production of around 125 thousand tonnes. Tracing

the current growth, it is expected to be among the top 20 largest copper producer by 2025. Copper exports

of the India was projected to be 18990 thousand tonnes in the time period of 2004-2009. Global

consumption forecast of Copper Wire Rod (CCR) is expected to be about 3% CAGR from 2013 to 2019.

Consumption growth rate is expected to be stable in regions such as Asia (other than China), South Africa

and America.

Thus, owing to the big supply demand gap in the CCR market, the unit would like to increase the production

capacity 2,40,000 MT/annum to 4,84,000 MT/annum by setting up by setting up of a new Continuous Cast

Copper Rod plant of 2,44,000 TPA capacity in the existing Copper smelter complex.



The proposed products cater to the following industries:

Automotive & transport:

Copper plays an instrumental role in the automotive industry. The total weight of copper in a vehicle ranges

from 15 kilos for a small size car like hatchbacks to 30 kilos for a high-end car.

Various components such as alternators, motors, actuators and the wire harness system depend on high

conductivity which is superbly offered by copper. More copper will be needed as automotive electrical

developments increases awareness, safety, comfort and automation.

Supreme quality copper supplied by Birla Copper has helped produce high purity copper wire harness

system which is used to carry the current from the battery throughout the vehicle which includes the lights,

central locking, on-board computers, satellite navigation systems, etc.

Consumer durables:

Consumer durables such as air conditioners and refrigerators utilize copper tubes as heat exchangers

because of its excellent thermal conductivity and heat dissipation property. The cathode ray tubes present in

televisions as well as magnetron used in a microwave oven are made of copper. It is used in wiring and

contacts for mobile phones, televisions, and computers. Copper is used in microprocessors and heat-sinks.

Being an energy efficient metal, copper and its alloys finds various applications in electronics.

Electrical equipment:

Copper finds a plethora of applications in the electrical industry due its highest electrical conductivity

among the commercial metals. In addition to its excellent electrical and thermal conductivity, copper has

ideal mechanical properties and can be easily fabricated. More than half of the copper produced is used for

electricity.

The important uses include power generation and transmission of electricity. It is used in cables,

transformers, motors, busbars, alternators, generators, etc., to provide electricity throughout the country,

safely and efficiently.

Birla Copper has been dominantly involved in supplying high quality copper to a majority of players in the

electrical industry.

http://www.hindalco.com/industries/copper/consumer-durables

http://www.hindalco.com/industries/copper/electrical-equipment



Railway:

Copper is indispensable to the development of electrical locomotives. The modernization and expansion of

the railway network in India is a continuous exercise requiring large amounts of copper and certain copper

alloys for the overhead electrification.

There is also a considerable use of copper in signaling systems, besides all the miscellaneous needs for

pantographs, switchgear, brake systems, motor windings, commutator bars, large and small service stations,

etc. should also be noted.

Wire & Cable industries:

Copper is extensively used in building wires, communication cables, co-axial cables, power cables,

specialty and industrial cables. Copper‘s high electrical conductivity, ductility and tensile strength make it

an ideal metal in the wire and cable industry.

Birla Copper‘s superior quality copper rods has been a preferred choice in this industry for years.

2.2 PROJECT LOCATION

The proposed expansion project site lies at approx. geographical co-ordinates 21042‘09.48‖ N Latitude &

72032‘15.95‖ E Longitude. The unit is located at Dahej industrial estate developed in Survey No. 29 to

39,101,104 to 110,112 to 115,117 to 122 of village Dahej (Plot No. 2 of Dahej GIDC) and Survey No 646 to

671, 679, 685, 732 to 742, 744 to 752 of Village: Lakhigam, Taluka: Vagra, Dist: Bharuch, Gujarat. Nearest

state highway from the project site is SH-6, which is approx. 5.5 km and nearest state highway is NH-8,

which is 46 km away from the project site. Dahej railway station is about 5.33 km and Bharuch railway

station is about 55 km. The study area is well connected with other major cities of the state and the country.

Google map of the project site is attached as Figure 2.1 & Layout plan is attached at Figure 2.2.

The coordinates of the site are as under:

Corner Latitude Longitude

1 21°42‘10.22‖ N 72°32'42.28" E

2 21°42‘56.89‖ N 72°32'10.48" E

3 21°41‘50.55‖ N 72°33'00.90" E

4 21°42‘06.97‖ N 72°33'05.92" E



2.2.1 SITE SELECTION CRITERIA

The project site is located in the notified industrial area developed by Gujarat Industrial

Development Corporation (GIDC), having all basic facilities like availability of water and natural

gas, electricity, existing Pipeline for final disposal of treated effluent into deep sea etc.

The industrial unit is located in notified industrial area, which is having transportation facilities like

linkage with Bombay and Delhi by Broad Gauge railway and National Highway No. 8.

There is no historical place, sanctuaries, forestland or prime agriculture land within 10 km radius

from the project site.

The project site is in the industrial estate of Dahej, thus no displacement of population will require.

The human resource required for the proposed expansion will be easily available.

2.2.2 ALTERNATIVE SITE SELECTION

As the proposed project is capacity enhancement project, alternative site has not been considered. The

existing premise of operational unit is the most convenient site for the proposed expansion project.

Moreover all the utilities & infrastructure facilities are available in the present set up. Hence the existing

premise with set extra infrastructure & ease of operation is the best option available for proposed expansion.

2.2.3 CONNECTIVITY AND SALIENT FEATURES OF THE PROJECT SITE

Dahej Industrial Estate was set up by Gujarat Industrial Development Corporation. This industrial estate is

spread over an area of 4100 hectare area. Out of this total area of around 4100 Hectors, about 1800 hectors

is carved out separately for the development of the Special Economic Zones (SEZ). The Dahej GIDC

comprises of some big industries like Hidalco Industries Limited, GCPTCL, Reliance Industries Limited,

LNG, GACL, BASF, etc. Development of communication systems is well available due to proximity of

Dahej town and Bharuch city. The GIDC Dahej is situated adjacent to Gulf of Khambhat. The Dahej GIDC

has also a developed port for handling liquid and solid cargos.

GIDC estate of Dahej is well connected with rest part of India by road (National Highway No.8) and rail

(Western Railway). Water is available from GIDC water supply scheme. The project location is well

connected with road, rail and air route to transport raw materials, finished products, machineries, etc. and

hence, it exhibits good potential for industrial growth. The salient features mentioned below, indicate

favorable conditions for industrial development at the project location.



Figure No 2.1: Google Map



Figure No 2.2: Proposed Expansion Area



Figure No 2.3: Plant Layout



Figure No 2.4: Details of proposed Expansion



2.3.4 SALIENT FEATURES OF THE PROJECT SITE

Table No: 2.1- Salient Features

Particulars Details

Approx. Geographical Co-ordinates Approx. Center 21°42‘09.48‖ N Latitude &

72°32‘15.95‖ E

Village Lakhigam: appx. 1.65 km –SE

Dahej: appx. 4.2 km –NE

Nearest Town Bharuch: appx. 46.90 km – E

Nearest Sea Coast Appx.2.56 km –W

Nearest Highway State Highway (SH) No: 206 – appx. 2 km SE

National Highway- appx. 08: 47 km – E

Nearest Railway Station Dahej Railway line: appx. 5.75 km–NEE

Bharuch Railway Station: appx. 47.20 km –SE

Nearest Airport Bhavnagar Airport: appx. 37.40 km – WWN

Surat Airport: appx. 67.60 km –WWE

National parks/ sanctuaries None within 10 km radial periphery

Densely Populated or built – up Area Bharuch town: appx. 46.90 km – E

Note: All the above mentioned distances are the aerial distances from project site.



Table No: 2.2- Nearby Industries

No Name of Industry Type Distance km Direction

1 GCPTCL Chemical 2 South

2 Styrolution Chemical 3.1 East

3 BASF Chemical 2.6 East

4 Reliance Industries Limited Petroleum 5 South East

5 Deepak Nitrate Limited Fertilizer 7.4 East

6 NOICIL Chemical 6.7 East

7 GACL Chemical 7.4 East

8 GFL Chemical 10 East

9 ISGEC Chemical 9 East

10 Petronet LNG Petroleum 10 South

11 Organic Industries Limited Chemical 3.9 East

12 Adani Petronet (Dahej) Port Pvt.

Ltd.

Shipping 8 South

2.3 PROJECT LOCATION DESCRIPTION

2.3.1 DESCRIPTION OF LAND USE, GEOLOGY, TOPOGRAPHY

(i) Land form, Land use & Land ownership

Proposed project site is in GIDC industrial estate and adjacent to many industries. Thus land use pattern is

non-agricultural and specifically declared for the industrial activities by the town planner. Land is in

possession with the proponent. Land documents are attached as Annexure-3.



There shall be no change in land use pattern as the proposed project falls with a GIDC Industrial Estate area

and more over proposed expansion will be carried out in existing premises. No forests, national park, water

bodies or eco sensitive areas located within 10 km periphery of the proposed project site.

(ii) Topography

Proposed location is between 20007‖ to 21

042‖ North Latitude (please check) and 72

043‖ to 73

000‖ East

Longitude having elevation of 25 meters above sea level. The overall project site is located on plain barren

land devoid of any permanent and economically useful vegetation. The topography of the proposed site for

the project is plain terrain.

No other forests, national park or wild life sanctuary is located within 10 km periphery of the proposed

project site. No change in Topography is envisaged as the proposed project shall be established in existing

well developed Industrial Estate, Dahej.



(iii) Geography and Climate

Bharuch is located at 21.7°N 72.97°E. It has an average elevation of 15 meter (49 feet). Bharuch is a port

city situated on the banks of the Narmada river. The damming of the Narmada caused the original port

facilities to close, the nearest port is now in Dahej. The Bharuch district is surrounded by Vadodara (North),

Narmada (East) and Surat (South) districts. To the west is the Gulf of Khambhat.

Bharuch has a tropical savanna climate, moderated strongly by the Arabian Sea. The summer begins in early

March and lasts until June. April and May are the hottest months, the average maximum temperature being

40°C. Monsoon begins in late June and the city receives about 800 millimetres (31 in) of rain by the end of

September, with the average maximum being 32 °C during those months. October and November see the

retreat of the monsoon and a return of high temperatures until late November. Winter starts in December

and ends in late February, with average temperatures of around 23 °C (73 °F). Very often heavy monsoon

rain brings floods in the Narmada basin area. The city had witnessed major floods in the past, but now the

floods have been controlled after the damming of the Narmada.

(iv) Geology:

Bharuch district is bounded in the north by Vadodara district, in south by Surat district, in east by

Maharashtra state and in the west by the Arabian sea. The district can be divided into three geomorphic

units. (a) hilly area in the east (b) alluvial plain and (c) coastal zone. The major perennial rivers of the

district are the Narmada and the Kim debauching into the Arabian sea. The northerly flowing Karjan,

Amravati and Kaven rivers; and southwesterly flowing Bhuki and Bhadra rivers merge with the Narmada

river. The area is well connected by roads and rails, the area experiences about 86 cm average annual

rainfall.

The study area comprises of the quaternary sediments that have been differentiated on the basis of their

environment of deposition. They comprise older tidal flats and tidal marsh deposits.

(v) Geohydrology:

The main hydrological unit in the area is alluvium formation. The alluvium formation mainly comprises of

alternate bands of sand and clay. The sand formation consists of medium to fine grained particles and works

as aquifer. The Geohydrological investigation work carried out in & around the study area reveals that the

area is covered with thick layer of flood plain deposits The ground water in area is highly saline so ground

water could not be extracted for any purposes.

The principal rivers draining the area are the Narmada in the southern most part of 10 km radius area. The

study area is nearly 7-8 kms from the main river.

http://tools.wmflabs.org/geohack/geohack.php?pagename=Bharuch&params=21.7_N_72.97_E_



The ground water in area is highly saline so ground water could not be extracted for any purposes. Two

piezometers are constructed by GWRDC under different projects in this area. At Atali piezometer which has

the depth of 12 meter, the depth to water level varies from 2.60 meter to 6.6 meter, whereas at Dahej

piezometer having depth of 38.38 meter, water level ranges from 7.65 meter to 9.96 meter for year 2007-

2011.

(vi) Drainage Pattern:

The general observation reveals that the flow of the ground water is controlled by topography of the area. At

Dahej village the topography is sloping towards Northwest and West direction, hence ground water flow is

towards Northwest and West direction. Drainage pattern will not change due to proposed expansion as

location if flat terrain.

(vii) Existing infrastructure

Key infrastructures available around the project site:

No. Description Available around the project

1 Airports Yes,

Bhavnagar Airport: 37.40 km – WWN

Surat Airport: 67.60 km –SSW

2 Railway station Yes,

Dahej Railway line: 5.75 km–NEE

Bharuch Railway Station: 47.20 km –SE

3 Bus Station Yes

4 National Highways State Highway No-206- @ 2 km – SE

National highway No-8 @ 47 km – E

5 School/College Bharuch, town has primary, secondary, higher

secondary CBSE & GSEB schools as well as

Arts, Commerce & Science colleges.

6 Hospital Civil Hospital and private experts are available in

Bharuch district.

Proposed project site is in existing GIDC notified industrial estate so all infrastructures needed are available

there.



(viii) Soil Classification

The soil quality of the area is not considerably fertile for agricultural activities. No evidence of any

influence of contaminant has been noticed. In overall area, the agricultural productivity is very less due to

the absence of fertilization practices & poor fertility of soil.

(ix) Climatic conditions

Climate Semi-Arid

Seismic Zone III

Maximum temperature, 0C 44 °C

Minimum temperature, °C 12°C

Relative Humidity Max.:- 97 %; Min.:- 20%

Max Rain Period June to October (Max. July & August)

(x) Cyclone

Cyclones are huge revolving storms caused by winds blowing around a central area of low atmospheric

pressure, accompanied by high velocity wind. It brings torrential rains. It is observed that Dahej lies in a

very moderate damage risk zone. It has been estimated that the probability of the cyclonic depression is

very less.

Source: BMTPC, India (This map was collated based on the data compiled by the ministry of Urban Development &

poverty alleviation)



(xi) Earthquake:

An Earthquake is a sudden, rapid shaking of the earth caused by the breaking and shifting of rocks beneath

the earth surface. It is observed that the proposed project lies in very moderate risk zone. Bharuch district

has experienced earthquakes rarely with less intensity. Bharuch lies in the Seismic Zone III –Moderate

Damage Risk Zone, hence the earthquake is not a major risk for the proposed project.

Source: BMTPC, India (This map was collated based on the data compiled by the ministry of Urban Development &

poverty alleviation)



2.3.2 DESCRIPTION OF EXISTING INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES

The proposed expansion is carried out in the existing unit of HIL located at Dahej. All the utilities for the

proposed expansion such as Power supply, Water supply, etc. shall be availed from the existing

infrastructures of HIL. Proposed expansion is to be developed within the existing premises by using existing

infrastructure. No additional land will be purchased/procured for proposed expansion. Total plot area of the

plant premises is 327 ha and existing spare land of 4,680 sq. meter will be utilized for proposed expansion.

In proposed expansion, one no of additional induction furnace with 12 MT capacity will be installed with

additional APC equipments. Open space available near existing furnace will be utilized for proposed

furnace. Moreover, the greenbelt is developed in 35.78% of total land area in plant and township. The

density of plantation will be further increased.

Photographs of Existing unit:



2.4 RESOURCES REQUIREMENT

2.4.1 WATER REQUIREMENT

The fresh water supply to Birla Copper is made available by GIDC. The existing water supply as agreed by

GIDC is 5.5 MGD. The industrial demand of water for the complex is 40,000 KL /day with full production

capacity utilization. Total domestic water requirement for Birla copper is 194 KLD. The source of water

supplied to Dahej Industrial area by GIDC is the upstream of river Narmada. GIDC has agreed to provide

total water requirement after the proposed expansion up to 11 MGD for Birla Copper Complex. Thus the

complete water demand for the project will be met from GIDC supply. Industrial water requirement of

existing CCR plant is 640 KLD and for the proposed CCR plant will be 408 KL/Day. Domestic water

requirement of existing plant is 10 KLD and for proposed plant additional 8 KLD water will be required for

proposed expansion. Water withdrawal permission is attached as Annexure-4.

The water requirement for the proposed expansion is shown below:

No Activity Existing

(KLD)

Proposed

(KLD)

Total after

expansion

(KLD)

Construction Phase

1.0 Domestic -- 5.0 ---

Operation Phase

1.0 Domestic 10.0 8.0 18.0

2.0 Industrial 640 400 1040

a. Processing -- -- --

b. Boiler -- -- --

c. Cooling 630 390 1020

d. Coolant make up water 10 10 20

Total 650 408 1058



2.4.2 POWER REQUIREMENT

Source of power for existing Birla Copper will be fulfilled by existing captive power plants of 135 MW. Two

DG sets of 2.5 MW capacities are already provided at site for power backup, which will be used only during

power failure. The agreement for the supply of maximum demand of power requirement (i.e.40 MW) is also

made with Dakshin Gujarat Vij Company Ltd., which is drawn only in case of shortfall due to stoppage of in-

house generation.

Power requirement of existing CCR plant is 1300 KW and for proposed CCR plant additional 2500 KW

power will be required, which will be sourced from existing CPP.

2.4.3 FUEL REQUIREMENT

Liquified Natural Gas is used as a fuel in existing CCR plant and the consumption will be 30000 SCM / Day.

The gas will be procured from GAIL, GSPL & IOCL through pipelines.

For proposed expansion additional 27000 SCM/Day LNG will be required, which will be sourced from

existing source. Total fuel requirement for CCR plant after proposed expansion will be 57000 SCM/Day.

Fuel Used In Status Fuel Consumption Rate Calorific

Value, Kcal/M3

Liquid

Natural Gas

Furance-1

(18 TPH)

Existing 18,000 SCM/Day 8900

Furance-2

(7 TPH)

Existing 12,000 SCM/Day

Furance-1

(35 TPH)

Proposed

Expansion)

27,000 SCM/Day



2.4.3 LAND REQUIREMENT

Total Plot area: 327 ha, land is already in possession of project proponent, document of the same is attached

as Annexure-3. Additional 4,680 sq. meter of area will be required for proposed expansion.

Sr.

No. Units

Area (Ha)

I II III

Existing as a whole Proposed CCR

Plant (Expansion)

Total After

Proposed Expansion

(I + III)

1

Process Plant

(including Roads, Parking,

Administrative building, ETP area)

57 0.2580 57.2580

2 Storage Warehouse 126 0.2100 126.21

3 Underdeveloped area 2 -0.468 1.532

4 Green Belt 117 -0.150 116.85

5 Township 25 --- 25

Total 327 --- 327

2.4.4 MANPOWER REQUIREMENT

For the existing CCR plant, total 107 nos. of employees are already recruited. During the proposed

expansion approx. 50 -70 nos. of people will get direct employment during the construction phase. Based on

the unit‘s organizational pattern, for proposed expansion additional 43 nos. of staff will be required to

operate plants.

Description Existing as

Whole

( All Plants)

Existing

CCR Plant

Proposed

CCR Plant

Management Staff 339 13 2

Supervisory Staff 481 21 5

Operating Staff 672 38 27

Contractor Staff 1986 35 09

Total 3478 107 43



2.4.5 PROJECT COST BREAKUP

Sr. No.

Section/Equipment Cost (INR)

1 Plant & machinery & EMS 1,387,545,820

2 Auxiliaries 55,848,868

3 Mechanical 207,990,478

4 Electrical 60,234,786

5 Automation 18,672,999

6 Site development & Building 387,630,542

7 Lab equipment 14,362,000

8 Design & Engineering 49,418,287

9 Erection & commissioning 163,930,991

10 Miscellaneous 55,275,799

Total 2,400,910,569

~ 240.09 crores

Construction of proposed project will be started after getting the statutory clearances from the different

authorities. Completion of the proposed project will be appx. March 2018.

2.5 PRODUCTS & RAW MATERIALS

The raw material required by the existing CCR plant is Copper Cathode, The other consumables are IPA

solution and coolant. Copper Cathode is procured from existing refinery of the unit and other two materials

are being purchased from domestic market and same will be followed after expansion.



2.5.1 RAW MATERIALS

2.5.1.1 RAW MATERIALS TRANSPORTATION

Key raw materials required for the manufacturing of Continuous Cast Copper Rod Plant is Electrolytic

grade Copper Cathodes conforming to international quality standards BS 6017 1981 (1989) Cu-Cath-

1/ASTM B-115 (1999). These are square shaped with purity levels of >99.99% copper and are characterized

by high grade with lowest level of various group and individual impurities.

Requirement of Raw Materials / Consumables

Raw Materials Unit Unit

Consumption per

MT

Quantity (TPM)

Existing Proposed Total

Copper Cathode* MT 1.00 20000 20334 40334

IPA Solution Ltr. 0.75 1500 1525 3025

Coolant Ltr. 0.0625 1250 1271 2521

* These will consumed from existing refineries.

Raw Material - Copper Cathode sheets



Chemical Composition of Raw Material used:

Properties Unit Copper Cathode*

Copper % 99.99

Selenium ppm 2.0

Tellurium ppm 2.0

Bismuth ppm 1.0

Antimony ppm 4.0

Lead ppm 5.0

Arsenic ppm 5.0

Iron ppm 10.0

Nickel ppm 10.0

Tin ppm 5.0

Sulfur ppm 15.0

Silver ppm 25.0

*Copper Cathode as per ASTM B115-2010

2.5.2 DETAILS OF PRODUCT

PRODUCTS

Name of Product

Capacity TPA


Continuous Cast Copper Rod * 2,40,000 2,44,000 * 4,84,000

*The product 20334 TPM (2,44,000 TPA) will be copper rods (Dia. 8 mm to 26 mm) in the form of coils. The

coil ID will be 1650 mm & OD will be 1000 mm. Coil weight will be 2.0 – 5.0 MT.



Finish Product - Continuous Cast Copper Rod

Chemical Composition of Product:

Properties Unit Continuous Cast

Copper Rod*

Copper % > 99.95

Selenium ppm 2.0

Tellurium ppm 2.0

Bismuth ppm 1.0

Antimony ppm 4.0

Lead ppm 5.0

Arsenic ppm 5.0

Iron ppm 10.0

Nickel ppm 10.0

Tin ppm 5.0

Sulfur ppm 15.0

Silver ppm 25.0

*Copper Cast Rod as per ASTM B49-2010



Finish Packed Product



2.6 PLANT & MACHINERIES

The proposed expansion will be carried out in the existing premises only, but the unit will install new CCR

plant in the phased manner for the production of proposed capacity. The unit will install new plant and

machinery for the proposed expansion expansion by adopting the technology from CONTIROD of M/s

SMS-Meer, Germany. The lists of equipment for the existing and expansion for the CCR plant are given in

Table

Table No – 2.8(A): Details of Equipments for the existing CCR plant

Sr.

No.

Equipment Quantity MOC Size (m)/

Capacity

Capacity

(MT/hr)

1. Melting Furnace – 1 1 Refractory, MS 2.5 x 7.0 m 18

2. Holding furnace - 1 1 Refractory, MS 3.0 x 6.0 m 16

3. Casting M/C - 1 1 MS Copper 5 m 18

4. Rolling Mill - 1 1 MS,SS 12 m 18

5. Coiler - 1 1 MS 3.0 x 5.0 m 18

Table No– 2.8(B): Details of Equipment for the existing CCR plant

Sr.

No.

Equipment Quantity MOC Size (m)/

Capacity

Capacity

(MT/hr)

1 Melting Furnace – 2 1 Refractory,

MS

2.0 x 6.0 m 7

2 Holding furnace - 2 1 Refractory,

MS

2.5 x 3.5 m 7

3 Casting M/C - 2 1 MS

Copper

5m 7

4 Rolling Mill - 2 1 MS,SS 10 m 7

5 Coiler - 2 1 MS 3.0 x 5.0m

M

18



Table No – 2.8(B): Details of equipment for the CCR plant-Proposed Expansion

Sr. No. Equipment Quantity MOC Size (m)/

Capacity

Capacity

(MT/hr)

1 Melting Furnace – 3 1 Refractory,

MS

2.65 x 12 m 35

2 Holding furnace - 3 1 Refractory,

MS

3.5 x 6m 20

3 Casting M/C - 3 1 MS

Copper

6 m 35

4 Rolling Mill - 3 1 MS,SS 13.5 35

5 Coiler - 3 1 MS 4.3 x 6.0 m 35

Details of Equipment for proposed plant

Loading cart

o Capacity: 3.5 MT

o MOC: MS

Melt ing furnace

o Melting capacity: 35 Mt/hr

o MOC: MS

o Height: 12 meter

o Diameter: 2.65 meter

o Burners: 19, nozzle mix type

o Centrifugal blowers: 3 numbers, total capacity: 15000 nm3/Hr, pressure: 0.270 bar

o Cooling blower: 1 number, total capacity: 2500 nm3/Hr, pressure: 0.16 bar



Stack

o Height: conical shaped stack will be provided supported in roof construction with height

of approximate 8 meter; thus total height of the stack will be ~ 26 meter.

o MOC: MS

Holding furnace

o Holding capacity: 20 MT

o Centrifugal blowers: 1 number, total capacity: 700 nm3/Hr, pressure: 0.10 bar

o Burners: 1 numbers, pre mixed type

Upper launder

o MOC: MS

o Combustion blowers: 1 number, total capacity: 1100 nm3/Hr, pressure: 0.10 bar

Lower launder

o MOC: MS

o Combustion blowers: 1 number, total capacity: 800 nm3/Hr, pressure: 0.10 bar

Cooling towers

o Qty: 02

o Fan: 02

o Heat load: 6000 KW

Overhead crane with 10 T capacity, qty: 02

Air compressors, Capacity: 2664 m3/hr, pressure: 7 kg/cm2



2.7 PROCESS DESCRIPTION

The manufacturing process is CONTIROD of M/s SMS-Meer, Germany. The process flow diagram of

proposed plant is mentioned as below.

Cathode Loading System:

It will consist of a bucket operated through winch motor assembly to charge copper cathodes to the

melting furnace. Lifting capacity will be 3.5 MT.

Melting/Shaft Furnace:

The melting furnace will be a shaft furnace, lined with heat-resistant & chemically inert refractory

equipped with 19 numbers of nozzle mixed type of gas-fired burners. Melting capacity will be 35 Mt/hr.

Furnace height will be 12 meter and diameter will be 2.65 meter. One conical shaped stack will be

provided supported in roof construction with height of approximate 8 meter, thus total height of the

stack will be ~ 26 meter.

Holding furnace:

Molten metal will flow from the bottom tap hole of melting furnace through launders and will b e

accumulated in holding furnace of 20 MT capacity. The furnace will be rotated according to



casting sump level requirement through hydraulic cylinder. All the process is automated, which control the

operating temperature and other operating parameters.

Auto-control System

Casting machine:

Molten metal from holding furnace will flow through second launder and to tundish. Level in

tundish will be controlled through stopper pin according to signal received from level sensor

between dam block & twin belt. The solid bar formed will be of 6300 mm2. Soothing material will be

applied to both, dam block and twin belts.

Existing Plant Photographs

Bar preparation machine:

The cast bar will be carried forward up to the rolling mill along a set of conveyor rollers and before

rolling, it requires to be trimmed on the edges for prevention of rolled-in oxide. These purposes are



served by the Bar Preparation Unit. It is having a set of straightener rollers, notcher assembly & trimmer

tools and a high pressure-spray box (for removal of scales before it enters the rolling mill).

Rolling mill:

In the rolling mill, the cast bar will undergo gradual deformation in 12 stages, depending on the cross-

section of the bar, its temperature & final product size. The roll passes will be designed for hot working at

the level of 28-40% deformation and the drive assembly will be synchronized with the casting motor

through DCS. Besides the rolling mill coolant distribution arrangement within the mill, the initial stands

are/will also equipped with high pressure sprays to ensure that no scales get embedded on to the stock

surface.

Cooling and non-acidic picking system:

At the end of rolling, the rod will need to be immediately quenched and cooled to prevent surface

oxidation. The pickling arrangement is meant for that. An aqueous solution of isopropyl alcohol will be

used as the pickling medium.

Waxing, coiling and packaging unit:

The pickled rod, before coiling and packing, will be waxed for improving its shelf-life. An aqueous

solution of wax will be sprayed on the moving rod and it will give a transparent protection to the rod. The

coil will be made on a wooden pallet, laying of the coil will be pre-designed for a very high

packing density, compacted hydraulically, covered with HDPE sheets all over and finally strapped at six

places with PET straps. Coil and pallet weight will be captured. Once the coil will be packed, it will be

moved to the warehouse for onward dispatch.

Finished Product Packaging of Product



Flow Diagram of Manufacturing Process

Brief Description:

The Continuous Cast Copper Rod will be manufactured from the copper cathodes (> 99.99% Purity)

produced at own plant of Birla Copper.

For manufacturing of continuous cast copper rod, unit will adopt technology from CONTIROD of M/s

SMS-Meer,Germany, which is the best available technology in the world.



Copper cathodes received from Refinery plant will be kept in the storage area of CCR plant.

Copper cathodes will then be charged in to the skip hoist of the vertical shaft furnace.

This furnace will operate solely on Liquefied Natural Gas, which is a clean fuel and as such there is

no source of pollution in this plant.

After melting of Copper cathode in furnace, it will flow into the holding furnace, through gas fired

covered launder to compensate heat loss.

During casting, holding furnace will be tilted to allow the molten copper to flow in to casting mold,

which will consist of water cooled wheel and steel belt.

Molten copper metal will be poured inside the casting wheel groove through fused silica spout. In turn

the solidified cast bar will continuously emerge out of the wheel.

The corner of the copper bar will be trimmed and then this bar will be continuously rolled into

8,11,12.5,16 and 19.6 mm diameter rods in Morgan no-twist rolling mill.

The rod coming out of rolling mill will be cooled with coolant water.

A coolant will be used to reduce the water evaporation losses, to increase the efficiency of the cooling

in the mill and will reduce the friction losses by lubrication.

Then cooled CC rods will be cleaned with IPA solution in a closed loop jacked vessel to remove

stains.

CC rods thus produced will be coiled, packed on wooden pallets and strapped for dispatch. Scrap and

edge cuttings will be recycled to the shaft Furnace.



2.8 POLLUTION POTENTIAL AND ITS CONTROL MEASURES

Based on the overall process study of the proposed products, following are the details of pollution potential

v/s. mitigation measures proposed by the company in areas of, air pollution, wastewater management

hazardous waste handling and management respectively as per the details given below:

2.8.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT

Details of flue gases, stack and process emission, nature of emitted pollutants and system alongwith air

pollution control device are mentioned in following table:

Sr.

No

Stack

Attached

To

Type of

Boiler/Furnace

Fuel Fuel

Consumption

Stack

Height

APC

device

Probable

pollutant

Existing

1

S Shaft

furnace

Vertical Shaft

furnace

LNG 18000

SCM/Day

26 mtr Efficient

Burners &

Adequate

stack

height

with SMF

PM< 150

mg/Nm3

SOx<100 ppm

NOx<50 ppm

2 Shaft

furnace

Vertical Shaft

furnace

LNG 12000

SCM/Day

26 mtr Efficient

Burners &

Adequate

stack

height

with SMF

PM< 150

mg/Nm3

Sox<100 ppm

NOx<50 ppm

Proposed

1 Shaft

furnace

Vertical Shaft

furnace, lined

with heat-

resistant &

chemically inert

refractory.

LNG 27000

SCM/Day

26 mtr Efficient

Burners &

Adequate

stack

height with

SMF

PM< 150

mg/Nm3

Sox<100 ppm

NOx<50 ppm



2.8.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Water Consumption & Wastewater Generation

Source of water: GIDC water supply line

GIDC has agreed to provide total water requirement up to 11 MGD for Birla Copper Complex. Water

withdrawal permission is attached as Annexure-4.

Total industrial demand of water for the complex is 40,000 KL/day with full production capacity utilization.

Total domestic water requirement for Birla copper is 194 KLD. Domestic water requirement of existing

CCR plant is 10 KLD and for proposed plant additional 8 KLD water will be required for proposed

expansion. Industrial water requirement of existing CCR plant is 640 KLD and for the proposed CCR plant

will be 408 KL/Day.

The water requirement for the proposed expansion is shown below:


(KLD)

Proposed

(KLD)

Total after

expansion

(KLD)

Construction Phase

1.0 Domestic -- 5.0 -----

Operation Phase

1.0 Domestic 10.0 8.0 18.0

2.0 Industrial 640 400 1040


b. Industrial Cooling water 630 390 1020

c. Coolant make up water 10 10 20

Total 650 408 1058



Wastewater Generation:


(KLD)

Proposed

(KLD)

Total after

expansion

(KLD)

1.0 Domestic 8.0 6.0 14.0

2.0 Industrial 10.006 8.006 18.012


b. Industrial Cooling water 10 8 18

c. Coolant waste water* 0.006 0.006 0.012

Total 18.006 14.006 32.012

* This will generate once in a six months.

Sewage:

Sewage is expected to be generated due to domestic activities of workmen and staff personnel during

construction phase as well as operation phase. Sanitation facility of existing plant shall be provided during

the construction and operation phase of proposed expansion. Generated additional sewage will also be

treated in existing Sewage Treatment Plant (MBR Technology) of 500 KLD capacity. Treated sewage

is/will be reused in process.

Effluent:

There will be no wastewater generation on daily basis from the manufacturing of CCR but the only

negligible generation of wastewater from the cleaning of coolant water tank of rolling mill intermittently.

This will be about 1.0 KL in a six month (@0.006 KL/day). Other wastewater will be generated from

cooling tower blow down i.e. 8 KLD for proposed expansion, this wastewater will not be generated only

daily basis but after number of multiple continuous recycle will be reused for slag granulation or lime slurry

preparation in ETP.

The existing ETP capacity is 320 m3/hr and capable to take care of the additional negligible quantity of

effluent generated from proposed CCR plant. The treated effluent is/will be utilized for the lime slurry

preparation, make up in slag granulation and in gas cleaning system within the premises. Hence, proposed

expansion is/will achieve zero liquid discharge.



2.8.3 HAZARDOUS/SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

Presently, ETP sludge, Spent Oil, Spent Catalyst, Discarded containers, Spent Resins, Used lead Batteries

and Copper as precipitate are generated from the whole Birla Copper unit. The unit has already adopted

proper Environmental Management Plan for the Hazardous/ Solid Waste disposal. The unit has its own

TSDF site for the disposal of solid or hazardous waste. There will be no generation additional of

hazardous/solid waste from the existing or proposed CCR unit.

Hence, no Hazardous/Solid waste will be generated from proposed expansion project.

2.8.4 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Noise is an unwanted sound and excessive noise is harmful to health and diminishes the quality of life.

Thus, noise is considered as one of the potential pollutant. Management of noise includes the monitoring

and controlling of noise levels, at source, the transmission paths and the surrounding environment. The

noise generation inside plant ranges from 64-75 dB(A) at day time due to heavy machinery operations.

Noise generation during the nighttime ranges from 60-70 dB(A). There will not be any major source of

noise generation due to proposed expansion of CCR plant. The auxiliary sources of Noise generation

sources would be manufacturing activity within the premises and transportation within and outside the

premises.

Use of PPEs like ear plugs and ear muffs is/will be made compulsory near the high noise generating

machines.

Higher noise level shall be felt only near the active working areas. However, at distance away from the

source, the level gets considerably reduced. The plant and equipment shall be specified and designed with a

view to minimize noise pollution.

Noise Control Measures:

All the vibrating parts shall be checked periodically and serviced to reduce the noise generation. The

equipment, which is prone to generate excessive noise, shall be provided with enclosures etc.

To minimize the adverse effects on the health, ear-muffs/ear-plugs shall be provided to the workers

working under high noise area.

To reduce the noise generation during the transportation activities; the vehicle shall be kept

periodically serviced and maintain as per the requirement of latest trend in automobile industry.

Only those vehicles with PUC‘s shall be allowed for the transportation.

All the equipment in the complex shall be designed/operated in such a way that the noise level shall

not exceed 80 dB (A).



2.8.5 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

Traffic Management Plan will be developed for the proposed expansion by HIL for proper management of

traffic generated due to the transportation vehicles for raw material and finish products transportation. The

proponent has a good network of internal peripheral roads in the plots for the safety and access requirements

to various buildings and yards. Moreover, the project is in a well-developed area of GIDC Industrial Estate

with necessary infrastructure facilities & well connected with road network. Hence traffic increased due to

the project will not be an issue.

Raw material used for Continuous Cast Copper Rod is/will be procured from existing copper smelter unit.

No. of trucks used for transportation of existing products

No Particulate Type of vehicle Number of trucks

1 Copper Cathode Trucks

30 nos./day

2 Copper Rod Trucks

25 nos./day

No. of trucks used for transportation of proposed products

No Particulate Type of vehicle Number of trucks

1 Copper Cathode Trucks

5 nos./day

2 Copper Rod Trucks

50 nos./day

Due to proposed expansion no additional traffic will be generated as nos. of trucks will not increase.



2.9 HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT

The company is very much concerned in terms of health, safety and environment protection. The company

has a ‗Health, Safety & Environment Policy‘ for taking care of the health and safety of its employees.

The following key safety measures are a part of the Health & Safety policy of the company and shall be

followed even after the proposed expansion:

Safety Training is provided to the employees.

Safety Sirens with Alarm System in case of emergency is provided.

Fire Hydrant System is installed.

Fire Extinguishers are provided.

Mock drills are periodically conducted and factors like response time are evaluated.

First Aid Facility and training is provided.

Personnel protective gears and equipments are provided to the employees.

Health check-ups are organized at regular intervals.

2.10 GREEN BELT

Greenbelt development is an efficient mitigation measure for control/prevention for Air pollution & Noise

pollution. Plants play an important role in the absorption of certain pollutants and also act as barrier for

noise propagation. The greenbelt has already been developed task in the existing premises and additional

green belt will be developed as a part of the proposed expansion.

The greenbelt landscape plan provides benefits to improve beautification. It also results in the prevention of

land degradation due to construction activities; enhancing the canopy cover as a wind breaker wall and

restrict the carry-away of the PM outside the premises as well as for noise abatement. After the proposed

expansion, regular assessment shall be done to see that greenbelt is growing adequately with all necessary

works like thick plantation, rearing, irrigation, fertilization, re-plantation (if required), pest control and other

allied factors. Regular records of the greenbelt development as suggested in environmental monitoring plan

shall be maintained.

The greenbelt development plan shall focus on the following objectives:

Reduce impact of air pollution.

Attenuate noise generated



Reduce the effect of fire and explosion

Improve the general environment and aesthetics of the area

Provide suitable habitat for fauna

Control soil erosion



CHAPTER-3

BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

3.1 INTRODUCTION

Human influences the baseline scenario over a long duration. These changes occur due to interference by

human being because of every anthropogenic activity has some impact on the environment. In most of the

cases it is more harmful to the environment than individual. It is the responsibility of society and government

authority to take effective steps for harmonising developmental activities with respect to the environmental

concerns. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is one of the tools available with the planners to achieve

the above mentioned goal. It is desirable to ensure that the development options under consideration are

sustainable. In doing so, environmental consequences must be characterised early in the project cycle and

accounted for in the project design.

The base line data of existing environmental conditions are very essential for Environmental Impact

Assessment and Prediction of impacts due to any proposed activities. The purpose of the study is to provide

the information basis for monitoring and assessing an activity. It also helps to determine project compliance

with regulatory requirements, standard and government policies. This is an important intend of

―Environmental Impact Assessment‖ Study. The base line data are collected from the study area to meet the

need of this purpose.

Environmental monitoring is a systematic measurement of key environmental indicators over time within a

particular geographic area. The baseline environmental quality is assessed through field studies within the

impact zone for various components of the environment viz. air, noise, water, soil, biological and socio-

economic. The baseline environmental study has been conducted for the study region within 10 km radius of

the project site for the period Mar 2016 to May 2016. An exhaustive attempt has been made in the current

chapter to disclose all possible base line status of environmental quality in the vicinity of the project, which

further serves as the basis for identification, prediction and evaluation of impacts. Villages covered within

study region are shown in the Figure No. 3.1.1.



Figure no. 3.1.1: Map showing the study region with locations for ambient air, noise & soil...etc.

Table No.3.1.1 Environment Monitoring Locations in the study region

Sr. No. Location Distance Direction with reference

to Project Site

01. Project Site -- --

02. Lakhigam Approx. 2.0 km SE

03. Birla copper jetty Approx. 3.5 km W

04. Luvara Approx. 3.5 km SW

05. Dahej Approx. 4.0 km S

06. Salt Pan area Approx. 4.5 km NE

07. Jogeshwar Approx. 4.5 km SE

08. Ambetha Approx. 5.0 km SE



The existing environmental setting has been considered to establish the baseline conditions which are

described in Table no. 3.1.2 with respect to following.

Land environment

Water Environment

Noise Environment

Air Environment

Meteorology

Ecology and Biodiversity

Demography and Socio-economic Environment

Table 3.1.2: Environmental Setting

Sr. No. Particulars Details

1 Geographical Co-ordinates of project site Approx. Center 21

042‘09.48‖ N Latitude &

72032‘15.95‖ E

2 Nearest Highway State Highway (SH) No: 206 –2 km SE

National Highway- 08: 47 km – E

3 Nearest Railway Station Dahej Railway line: 5.75 km–NEE

Bharuch Railway Station: 47.20 km –SE

4 Nearest Airport Bhavnagar Airport: appx. 37.40 km – WWN

Surat Airport: 67.60 km –WWE

5 Nearest Village Lakhigam: appx. 1.65 km –SE


6 Nearest Town/city Bharuch: 46.90 km – E

7 Sea Arabian Sea@ Approx. 4.0 km

8 Nearest River/ Stream Narmada River

9 Archaeologically Important Places None within 10 km radial periphery

10 National Park None within 10 km radial periphery

11 Sanctuary None within 10 km radial periphery

12 Reserve Forest None within 10 km radial periphery



3.2 METHODOLOGY

The baseline environmental study was carried out for the various environmental components viz, Air,

Water, Soil, Ecology and biodiversity, Socioeconomic and Noise. The study was conducted for the period

March 2016 to May 2016. Before the finalization of sampling locations to carry out the environmental

monitoring and survey our field area expert had visited the site. All the locations have been selected within

10 Km radius from the project site as per the requirement of TOR & environmental samples were collected

from the selected locations of the study area. Primary data for flora, fauna and socio economic were

collected to verify the secondary data. Sources of secondary data were various literatures published like

Census of India –2011, Environment Information Centre-Delhi, Forest department, District & Village

Panchayat, Internet etc. The scenario of environmental condition of the area was revealed from the sample

& data analysis that is described below in subsequent paragraphs.

3.2.1 STUDY PERIOD AND FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING

The period of study was Mar 2016 to May 2016. Details of frequency of environmental sampling

considered for the study are illustrated in Table No.3.2.1.

Table No 3.2.1: Frequency of Environmental Monitoring

Attributes

Sampling

Locations Parameters Frequency

A. Air Environment

Meteorological Data Nr. Project Site Temperature, Relative

Humidity, Precipitation

Wind direction, Wind

Speed

Hourly data from Mar

2016 to May 2016

Ambient Air Quality 8 locations in the study

area of 10 km radius.

PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx,

NH3, CO

24 hourly basis, twice a

week during study

period.

B. Noise 8 locations in the study

area of 10 km radius

Noise Levels in dB(A) Once in Study Period

C. Water

Ground Water Samples from 5 Locations

within 10 km radius from

the project site.

Physical, Chemical,

Microbiological and

Heavy Metal

Once in Study Period



Surface Water Samples from 1 Location


the project site.

Physical, Chemical,

Microbiological and

Heavy Metal


Marine Water Samples from 1 Location

during high tide and low

tide.

Physical, Chemical,

Microbiological,

Biological, Heavy Metal

and Sediment Sample


D. Soil Quality Samples from 8 locations


the project site.

Physical, Chemical

Characteristics, Soil

Texture


E. Land Use & Land

Cover

Within 10 Km radius of

study area

Existing Land use pattern --

F. Ecological Data Within 10 Km radius of

study area

Existing Flora & Fauna Once in Study Period

G. Socioeconomic

Data


study area

Socio-economic

characteristics of the

affected area


3.2.2 METHOD OF ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLING & ANALYSIS

The methods adopted for environmental sampling & analysis are illustrated in following Table No. 3.2.2.

Table No.3.2.2: Method of Environmental Sampling & Analysis

Attributes

Methods

Sampling/Preservation Analysis

A. Air Environment

Meteorological Data Data collected on hourly basis using

wind monitor as per CPCB Guideline. NA

Ambient air quality As per IS: 5182, CPCB & AWMA. As per IS:5182,CPCB & AWMA

B. Noise Instrument : Noise level meter Survey carried out as per EPA

C. Water

Ground Water Standard Methods for Examination of

Water and Wastewater, 22nd

edition,

APHA 2012

IS 3025 & Standard Methods for

Examination of Water and

Wastewater, 22nd

edition, APHA

2012

Surface Water



D. Soil Quality IS 2720, Soil Testing in India

(Department of Agriculture &

Cooperation)

IS 2720, Laboratory developed

Method as per NABL requirement and

Guideline and Soil Testing in India


Cooperation)

E. Land Use & Land

Cover

Land use map prepared by field area expert by visual image interpretation using

data of IRS P6 LISS III, NRSC Satellite image (2009), Hyderabad.

F. Ecology&

Biodiversity Data

Primary data collection by site visit

and Secondary data verification.

Primary data collection by site visit and

Secondary data verification.

G. Socioeconomic

Data





3.3 MICROMETEOROLOGY

The study of micro – meteorological data helps to understand the variations in the ambient air quality status

in that region. The prevailing micrometeorological condition at project site plays a crucial role in transport

and dispersion of air pollutants.

The persistence of the predominant wind direction and wind speed at the project site decide the direction and

extent of the air pollution impact zone.

The principal variables which affect the micrometeorology are horizontal transport and dispersion,

convective transport and vertical mixing and topography of the area towards local influences.

3.3.1 SOURCE OF METEOROLOGICAL DATA

Micrometeorological data were collected by using the wind monitor as per CPCB guideline which was

installed near project site. All the micrometeorological data were collected on hourly basis for the period

March 2016 to May 2016. Details of micrometeorological data are discussed in respective headings while

discussion of precipitation data is not mentioned as the monitoring activity was carried out in dry season and

it was found almost nil.

3.3.2 TEMPERATURE

During the study period minimum temperature was recorded as 16.20C on 3

rd Mar 2016 and maximum

temperature was recorded as 45.8oC on 28

th May 2016. Temperature data were collected on hourly basis

during the study period and daily maximum and minimum results are tabulated in Table No.3.3.1. Variation

of temperature is graphically presented in Figure No. 3.3.1.



Table No.3.3.1 Details of Temperature (°C) Nr. Project site (Mar’16 to May’16)

Date

Mar’16 Apr’16 May’16

Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

01 21.0 33.5 23.5 39.8 24.0 36.0

02 17.8 32.5 24.3 39.3 25.0 36.0

03 16.2 32.0 23.0 36.5 26.0 37.5

04 17.1 33.5 23.7 36.0 26.0 38.0

05 21.0 32.2 24.5 37.8 25.0 37.0

06 20.0 29.5 24.2 35.5 24.0 35.0

07 22.0 34.5 24.1 35.5 25.5 36.5

08 22.0 33.0 23.5 40.7 25.5 37.5

09 20.5 33.5 24.5 35.0 27.0 34.5

10 23.5 34.0 25.5 36.0 25.5 37.0

11 22.5 36.9 24.0 36.0 26.0 37.0

12 20.0 32.5 23.8 36.5 27.0 37.0

13 19.0 31.0 22.7 37.0 28.0 38.0

14 20.5 34.9 24.0 38.0 27.0 39.0

15 21.0 32.5 25.0 39.0 27.0 39.0

16 20.3 32.5 26.0 37.5 28.5 39.0

17 20.8 35.5 25.0 36.0 28.5 39.5

18 21.4 36.0 24.5 41.5 29.5 41.0

19 21.0 35.5 23.0 36.0 28.0 41.0

20 21.5 38.4 24.0 35.5 26.5 39.0

21 24.5 35.0 25.0 36.0 28.9 41.0

22 24.5 35.5 24.0 36.0 28.9 40.0

23 24.0 35.5 23.5 34.5 28.9 40.8

24 24.0 35.0 25.0 35.0 29.4 41.4

25 25.0 36.0 25.0 35.0 28.7 41.0

26 25.5 35.5 25.0 35.0 28.6 40.0

27 23.5 37.1 25.0 37.5 29.1 39.0

28 23.5 35.5 27.0 38.0 29.0 41.0

29 23.0 40.6 25.0 37.0 29.8 40.7

30 25.5 36.5 25.0 37.0 27.9 40.5

31 22.0 35.5 - - 27.8 39.5



Figure No 3.3.1 Graphical Presentation for month wise Temperature Variation

3.3.3 HUMIDITY

Humidity affects the nature and characteristics of pollutants in the atmosphere as it is the measure of amount

of moisture in the atmosphere. Humidity helps suspended particulate matter to coalesce and grow in size to

settle under the gaseous pollutants by providing them aqueous medium. Hourly data for humidity were

collected and the minimum humidity recorded was 15% in the month of Mar 2016 and maximum humidity

was recorded 94% in the month of May 2016.

Month-wise max.& min. data of humidity are tabulated in Table No.3.3.2. The variation in humidity is

represented graphically in Figure No.3.3.2.

Table No 3.3.2: Details of Humidity (%) Nr. Project site (Mar’16- May’16)

Date Mar’16 Apr’16 May’16

Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

01 46 64 43 72 30 68

02 41 78 43 76 31 78

03 49 76 43 75 22 61

04 42 72 26 73 30 68

05 41 65 34 58 31 69

06 40 75 31 68 31 76

07 32 64 32 51 34 77

08 40 71 39 61 25 59

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

March'16 April'16 May'16

Tem

per

atu

re (

0 C)

Max Min



09 34 61 35 68 30 81

10 35 59 23 51 35 75

11 34 59 36 49 34 75

12 36 72 30 50 33 68

13 37 71 36 62 29 62

14 42 69 34 67 34 59

15 24 65 39 58 22 59

16 24 60 32 69 27 65

17 31 55 36 64 29 60

18 34 56 26 56 30 65

19 27 53 31 62 27 56

20 30 71 40 71 32 62

21 23 68 25 54 23 92

22 23 50 32 69 36 94

23 23 49 33 67 42 88

24 30 54 37 74 43 86

25 15 42 38 76 36 91

26 22 52 25 68 35 93

27 34 51 23 58 32 92

28 31 50 29 79 23 91

29 20 48 23 69 27 64

30 14 69 32 72 22 66

31 44 70 - - 31 60



Figure No 3.3.2 Graphical Presentation for month wise Humidity Variation

3.4.4 WIND VELOCITY

Hourly wind speed data were collected for the period Mar 2016 to May 2016 with the help of Envirotech

make wind monitor. The rate of dispersion, diffusion and transportation of pollutants in the atmosphere

mainly depend on wind speed and its direction. Wind direction and velocity data have been collected during

the study period. Average wind speed data varies in the range of 1.1 to 9.9 km/hr during study period. It was

maximum in the month of May 2016. Month-wise average wind speed data are tabulated in Table No.3.3.3.

Table No.3.3.3 Details of Wind speed Nr. Project site (Mar’16- May’16)

Date Average Wind Speed (km/hr)

Mar’16 Apr’16 May’16

01 4.4 3.4

1.9

02 3.9

4.7

3.1

03 4.1

5.5

2.9

04 2.1

4.8

2.4

05 2.3

4.6

2.4

06 2.5

3.2

3.0

07 1.8

3.4

2.5

08 2.6

3.3

2.6

09 4.8

3.5

2.6

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

March'16 April'16 May'16

Hu

mid

ity

(%)

Max Min



10 4.7

6.2

2.3

11 2.1

6.1

2.4

12 3.1

3.7

5.7

13 3.5

3.7

5.3

14 2.9

3.3

3.2

15 4.4

2.5

3.3

16 2.5

1.6

4.2

17 4.2

2.1

5.1

18 5.1

4.5

6.0

19 2.6

2.4

6.8

20 1.8

2.2

6.9

21 2.7

1.9

6.2

22 1.1

3.5

8.1

23 1.2

4.5

9.9

24 1.3

4.2

9.8

25 2.8

6.6

7.4

26 3.0

5.2

7.2

27 3.9

5.7

7.0

28 4.4

6.3

6.5

29 2.5

5.6

4.6

30 2.6

5.3

5.7

31 2.0

- 5.0

3.3.5 WIND ROSE

Wind rose diagram is a graphical representation of the magnitude and direction of wind speed considering all

the directions.

From the knowledge of wind rose one can easily predict the direction and extent of spreading of the gaseous

and particulate matter from the source. Wind rose diagram has been prepared by using hourly wind velocity

and dominant wind direction data and is presented in Figure No 3.3.3



Figure No.3.3.3 Wind rose diagram (Mar’16-May’16)



3.3.6 INTERPRETATION OF MICROMETROLOGICAL DATA

Wind rose diagram indicate that dominant wind direction was SW to NE during the study period. It is also

interpreted that the villages fall in NE direction will be impacted with maximum extent by the project. On the

basis of micrometeorological data it is concluded that there is no drastic variation or irregularity in

micrometeorological condition of study area.

3.4 AIR ENVIRONMENT

Air is the Earth‘s atmosphere having the gases in which living organisms live and breathe but air is being

deteriorated day by day due to the anthropogenic and natural sources. In present scenario Industrialization,

Energy production and the burning of fossil fuels has polluted the air environment. Ambient air quality

monitoring was carried out for the assessment of the existing status of background air quality in the study

area. This will be useful for assessing the conformity of the ambient air quality to the standards even after

commencement of the proposed project.

3.4.1 SELECTION OF SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Following points were considered during the selection of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring locations.

Topography/terrain of the study area

Regional synoptic scale climatologically normal‘s

Densely populated areas within the region

Location of surrounding Industries

Representation of regional background

Facility for Ambient Air Monitoring

Representation of valid cross – sectional distribution in downwind direction

Avoidance of proximity of roads, construction activity or any other perturbing activity which may be

temporary in nature, which may lead to some erroneous conclusions.

Availability of manpower, electricity, approach, sturdy structure and protection of samplers.

Dominant Wind Direction

To establish the baseline status around the project site of the study region, monitoring was conducted for 8

locations during Mar 2016 to May 2016. At the time of location selection previous micrometeorological data

was referred & general wind pattern in the study region was considered for the selection of minimum one

location in the downwind direction i.e. NE and one in upwind direction as control i.e. SW. Upwind locations

were Luvara whereas downwind locations was considered as Salt Pan Area. However, ambient air monitoring

locations were selected in all the directions looking towards the possibility of change in wind pattern during



the study period. Locations are shown in Fig 3.1.1 and some photographs showing the sampling activities at

different locations are represented in Fig. No.3.4.1.

Figure No.3.4.1 Ambient Air Monitoring Photographs

Ambetha (Nr. Aashram) Dahej (Nr. School)

Jageshwar (Nr. Temple)



3.4.2 FREQUENCY AND PARAMETERS FOR SAMPLING

Sampling team was appointed with one FAE and Technical Assistant to carry out Ambient Air Quality

Monitoring for 8 locations within 10 km radius from the project site. Sampling & analysis was carried out as

per CPCB, IS 5182 & EPA for the parameters PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, NH3 & CO. Sample was brought to

the laboratory in Ice box and filter box for analysis. Frequency of sampling was twice a week during study

period.

3.4.3 INSTRUMENT FOR SAMPLING

Samples were collected by using the Respirable dust samplers & PM2.5 micron dust samplers at suitable

height above the Ground Level as per the availability of the facility. Methods of Sampling were adopted as

outlined by Central Pollution Control Board, Bureau of Indian Standard & National Environmental

Engineering Research Institute. Monitoring was carried out as per the instructions of instrument‘s manual.

Details of method are presented in Table No.3.4.1.

Table No 3.4.1 Details of Analysis Method

Sr.

No. Pollutant Test Method

1 PM2.5 CPCB Guideline

2 PM10 IS 5182 Part 23 2006

3 SO2 IS 5182 Part II 2001

4 NOx IS 5182 Part VI 2006

5 NH3 CPCB Guideline (Nessler Method)

6 CO Air & Waste Management Association (AWMA)

3.4.4 QUALITY OF AMBIENT AIR

Ambient air quality monitoring and analysis was carried out for 08 locations (table 3.1.1), as per the standard

methods. Minimum, maximum and percentile value for the parameters PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, NH3, and CO

are tabulated in TableNo.3.4.2 to Table No.3.4.6.



Table No.3.4.2 Percentile Value of PM10 & PM2.5 (Mar’16-May’16)

Sr.

No.

Sampling

Location

PM10 PM2.5

Min.

(µg/m3)

Percentile Max.

(µg/m3)

Min.

(µg/m3)

Percentile Max.

(µg/m3) 25 50 75 98 25 50 75 98

1 Project Site 68.9 79.4 81.9 86.3 90.7 90.9 37.0 38.9 41.2 43.5 47.6 49.0

2 Lakhigam 68.3 76.7 80.6 85.2 94.1 94.9 36.6 40.1 41.9 44.7 51.9 52.3

3 Birla Copper

Jetty 70.1 78.8 83.2 88.3 94.4 96.1 37.1 40.5 42.2 46.7 52.8 53.8

4 Luvara 68.1 76.1 80.1 85.8 91.7 92.2 37.4 39.7 41.6 44.3 49.3 50.3

5 Dahej 68.6 76.2 80.6 83.6 90.5 92.1 37.7 39.8 41.4 45.7 50.1 50.9

6 Salt Pan Area

69.9 76.9 82.1 85.4 93.6 94.1 37.8 40.9 43.4 45.5 50.9 51.4

7 Jageshwar 72.7 78.0 80.9 86.3 93.6 94.4 37.1 40.1 42.7 46.0 50.9 52.3

8 Ambetha 67.0 74.7 79.9 82.8 89.7 91.6 36.5 38.6 40.6 43.0 48.5 49.3

Table No. 3.4.3 Percentile Value of SO2 & NOx (Mar’16-May’16)

Sr.

No.

Sampling

Location

SO2 NOX

Min.

(µg/m3)

Percentile Max.

(µg/m3)

Min.

(µg/m3)

Percentile Max.

(µg/m3) 25 50 75 98 25 50 75 98

1 Project Site 9.1 9.6 10.6 11.8 12.2 12.5 14.3 15.8 17.8 19.2 20.5 20.7

2 Lakhigam 14.4 15.7 16.6 17.5 18.2 18.3 20.1 21.5 22.6 23.4 25.3 25.6

3 Birla Copper

Jetty 13.9 14.4 15.0 16.1 16.6 16.6 19.7 20.8 22.7 23.9 24.9 25.1

4 Luvara 14.2 16.1 16.4 17.2 18.0 18.1 19.0 21.7 22.2 23.3 24.8 24.9

5 Dahej 15.6 16.3 16.9 17.5 18.2 18.3 18.2 20.8 21.2 23.5 25.2 25.4

6 Salt Pan

Area 13.9 14.4 15.0 15.4 16.3 16.3 18.7 21.2 22.6 23.3 24.7 24.9

7 Jageshwar

14.2 15.0 15.6 16.1 17.7 17.8 19.3 21.1 22.3 23.4 24.6 24.9

8 Ambetha 13.9 14.6 15.0 16.1 17.5 17.5 19.3 20.6 21.3 22.9 24.5 24.6



Table No3.4.4 Percentile Value of NH3& CO (Mar’16-May’16)

Sr.

No.

Sampling

Location

NH3 CO

Min.

(µg/m3)

Percentile Max.

(µg/m3)

Min.

(µg/m3)

Percentile Max.

(µg/m3) 25 50 75 98 25 50 75 98

1 Project Site 0.9 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.3 2.3 455.0 478.8 495.0 510.0 525.0 525.0

2 Lakhigam 0.4 0.8 0.9 1.3 1.9 1.9 470.0 488.8 507.5 520.0 535.4 540.0

3 Birla Copper

Jetty 1.3 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.5 470.0 495 512.5 525.0 540.0 540.0

4 Luvara 0.8 0.9 1.3 1.4 1.9 1.9 490.0 510 522.5 535.0 542.7 545.0

5 Dahej 0.4 0.8 0.9 1.3 1.4 1.4 490.0 513.8 522.5 530.0 540.0 540.0

6 Salt Pan Area 1.3 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.5 470.0 483.8 500.0 511.3 530.4 535.0

7 Jageshwar 0.4 0.7 0.9 1.3 1.7 1.9 480.0 500.0 520.0 526.3 535.0 535.0

8 Ambetha 0.4 0.4 0.9 0.9 1.4 1.4 485.0 497.5 510.0 526.3 540.0 540.0



Figure No. 3.4.2 PM10 Conc. Variation in study Area

Figure No. 3.4.3 PM2.5 Conc. Variation in Study Area

Project Site LakhigamBirla Copper

JettyLuvara Dahej Salt Pan Area Jageshwar Ambetha

Maximum 90.9 94.9 96.1 92.2 92.1 94.1 94.4 91.6

Minimum 68.9 68.3 70.1 68.1 68.6 69.9 72.7 67

Average 82.2 81.2 83.0 80.3 80.0 81.6 82.0 79.0

Limit 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

Co

nc

en

tra

tio

n i

n µ

g/m

3

Sampling Location

PM10 Concentration in study area (Mar'16 - May'16)



Maximum 49 52.3 53.8 50.3 50.9 51.4 52.3 49.3

Minimum 37 36.6 37.1 37.4 37.7 37.8 37.1 36.5

Average 41.5 42.8 43.6 42.1 42.9 43.7 43.3 41.2

Limit 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Co

nc

en

tra

tio

n i

n µ

g/m

3

Sampling Location

PM2.5 Concentration in study area (Mar'16 - May'16)



Figure No.3.4.4 Variation in SO2 Conc. In study area

Figure No.3.4.5 Variation in NOx Conc. In study area

Project Site LakhigamBirla

CopperJetty

Luvara DahejSalt Pan

AreaJageshwar Ambetha

Maximum 12.5 18.3 16.6 18.1 18.3 16.3 17.8 17.5

Minimum 9.1 14.4 13.9 14.2 15.6 13.9 14.2 13.9

Average 10.7 16.4 15.2 16.5 16.9 15.0 15.7 15.4

Limit 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

01020304050607080

Co

nc

en

tra

tio

n i

n µ

g/m

3

Sampling location

SO2 concentration in Study Area (Mar'16 - May'16)



Maximum 20.7 25.6 25.1 24.9 25.4 24.9 24.9 24.6

Minimum 14.3 20.1 19.7 19 18.2 18.7 19.3 19.3

Average 17.6 22.6 22.5 22.4 21.9 22.2 22.2 21.7

Limit 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

Co

nc

en

tra

tio

n µ

g/m

3

Sampling Location

NOx Concentration in Study Area (Mar'16-May'16)



Table No.3.4.5 Ambient Air Quality Standards

Sr.

No. Pollutant

Avg. on basis

of Time

Industrial/Residential

Area Source

1 SO2 24 Hrs. 80 µg/m3 NAAQS

2 NOX 24 Hrs. 80 µg/m3 NAAQS

3 PM10 24 Hrs. 100 µg/m3 NAAQS

4 PM2.5 24 Hrs. 60 µg/m3 NAAQS

5 NH3 24 Hrs. 400 µg/m3 NAAQS

6 CO 8 Hrs. 2000 µg/m3 NAAQS

3.4.5 SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY

Results were compared with the standard for ambient air quality monitoring as per the Ministry of

Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC).

During the study PM2.5 was observed between 36.5–53.8µg/m3. Maximum concentration of PM2.5 was

found at Birla Copper Jetty.

PM10 was observed in the range of 67.0–96.1µg/m3.

Maximum concentration of PM10 was found at Birla

Copper Jetty. All the results of PM10 were found well within the prescribed norms.

SO2 concentration was observed in the range of 9.1-18.3 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit.

NOx concentration in Ambient Air quality was between 14.3 –25.6µg/m3, which is well within the standard

limit.

Monitoring and analysis was also carried out for NH3 & CO. Result for the parameters viz, NH3, and CO

were found well within the norms.

On the basis of test results found during the survey it can be concluded that the ambient air quality of the

study region is good as all the results are well within the limit.

3.4.6 INTERPRETATION OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY DATA

Results show that gaseous parameters are quite below the standard norms prescribed by CPCB & GPCB which

indicates that there is no chance to exceed the norms due to addition of measured gaseous parameters. Although

maximum concentration of PM10 is well within the limit.



3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Various noise scales have been introduced to describe in a single number the response of an average human

being to a complex sound made up of various frequencies at different loudness levels. The most common and

widely accepted is the weighted decibel dB (A) scale.

The objective of the baseline noise survey was to identify existing noise sources and to measure background

noise levels at the sensitive receptors within the study area.

Peoples‘ perception of noise varies depending on number of factors including their natural sensitivity and

hearing ability, past experience of sound, cultural factors and the time of day at which sound is experienced.

Continuous sound is perceived quite differently from intermittent sound at the same level. High or continuous

noise levels may cause permanent loss of hearing ranging from reduced perception at certain frequencies to

total deafness. At comparatively lower levels noise may have psychological effects including disturbance of

sleep, annoyance and irritation.

3.5.1 SOURCES OF NOISE POLLUTION

The sources of noise pollution in the study area are industrial noise, noise due to commercial activities, noise

generated by Community, vehicular traffic, etc.

3.5.2 NOISE LEVEL IN THE STUDY AREA

The noise level was monitored at different villages in study area and nearer to industrial area. Details of

locations are given in Table No. 3.1.1 & Figure No. 3.1.1. Results are tabulated in Table No. 3.5.1 & Table

No. 3.5.2.



Figure No. 3.5.1 Noise Monitoring Photographs

Ambetha (Nr. Aashram) Dahej (Nr. Primary School)

Jageshwar (Nr. Temple) Lakhigam (Nr. Primary School)

Table No 3.5.1 Noise Monitoring Report during day time (Mar’16-May’16)



Sr.

No. Location Lmax Lmin

Ld

1. Project Site 73.1 61.0 68.1

2. Lakhigam 68.1 60.1 65.0

3. Birla Copper Jetty 70.1 61.8 66.2

4. Luvara 66.8 58.1 63.8

5. Dahej 67.4 60.5 64.8

6. Salt Pan Area 70.1 60.8 65.6

7. Jageshwar 66.8 59.7 64.5

8. Ambetha 66.9 59.4 65.2

Table No 3.5.2 Noise Monitoring Report during night time (Mar’16-May’16)

Sr.

No. Location Lmax Lmin

Ln

1. Project Site 66.9 55.7 62.0

2. Lakhigam 61.8 53.3 58.9

3. Birla Copper Jetty 63.2 54.2 60.1

4. Luvara 59.9 53.1 57.1

5. Dahej 61.7 54.1 58.9

6. Salt Pan Area 65.8 54.3 59.0

7. Jageshwar 61.8 55.1 59.4

8. Ambetha 64.5 54.2 59.3

Note: Day time –6.00 am to 10.00 pm, Night time – 10.00 pm to 6.00 am



Figure No.3.5.2 Variation in Noise Level during day time

Figure No. 3.5.3 Variation in Noise Level during night time

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

Lmax

Lmin

Ld

Limit

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

Lmax

Lmin

Ld

Limit



Noise standards have been designated for different types of land use i.e. residential, commercial, industrial

areas and silence zones, as per ‗The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000, Notified by

Ministry of Environment and Forests, New Delhi, February 14, 2000. Different standards have been

stipulated for day (6 am to 10 pm) and night (10 pm to 6 am). The noise levels of the study area are

compared with the noise level standards as shown in Table No. 3.5.3.

Table No 3.5.3: Noise Level Standards

Sr.

No. Category of Area

Limits in dB(A)

Day time

6.00 a.m. to 10.00 p.m.

Night time

10.00 p.m. to 6.00 a.m.

1. Industrial Area 75 70

2. Commercial Area 65 55

3. Residential Area 55 45

4.

Silence Zone

i.e.Hospital,

EducationalInstitute, etc.

50 40

The noise level study shows that the noise levels are meeting the acceptable norms.

3.5.3 INTERPRETATION OF NOISE DATA

Maximum noise level was recorded 73.1 dB(A) during day time at Project site while the equivalent noise level

was 68.1 dB(A) which is well within the limit for industrial zone. Equivalent Noise level taken from all the

villages also meet with the norms for commercial area as per the Noise criteria given by the MoEFCC. Noise

Environment may affect in future due to addition of new industries in this industrial zone. There is need to

apply noise reducing devices at noise generating sources.

3.6 LAND ENVIRONMENT

Studies on land use aspects of eco system play an important role in identifying sensitive issues and to take

appropriate action to maintain ecological homeostasis in the region. The main objective of this section is to

provide a baseline status of the area, so that temporal changes due to the proposed port on the surroundings

can be assessed in future.

3.6.1 LAND USE PATTERN

Proposed project site is in an industrial area (GIDC) and adjacent to many industries. Thus land use pattern is

non-agricultural and specifically declared for the industrial activities by the town planner. Key infrastructure

such as hospitals, schools, bank, places of worship and social/ community facilities such as park, market,



playground etc. education, health care, community development, income distribution, employment and social

welfare are available in nearby area of proposed project site.

The area surrounding the project site is a well developed Industrial area. Much of the portion of the study area

is covered by Creek / Gulf of Cambay (i.e. 63 %). Agriculture and fallow land area oppucies around 10 % of

the total study area. Since the area is near the coast, saltwork industries have well flourished occupying nearly

9.7 % of the study area. The site is less than 2 kms from the creek on the west and nearly 5 kms from the south.

The other coastal area which is mostly a barren land occupies around 2 %. Wasteland occupies nearly 3 %.

Forest is also present within the study area which is around 3 %. While other tree clad area occupies around 1.7

%. The site is well connected with the road and railway network, this network occupies around 1 % of the total

study area. Buildup area in total occupies around 6 % out of which only 0.5 % comes under settlement while

5.5 % comes under industrial zone. Rivers, water body and canal network occupies the remaining portion of

the total study area.



Table No. 3.6.1 Land Use Detail

Row Labels Sum of Area SqKm Sum of Area SqKm

Agriculture 26.88 7.11%

Coastal Land 7.65 2.02%

Creeks 238.01 62.92%

Fallowland 10.42 2.75%

Forest 11.13 2.94%

Industries 20.89 5.52%

Jetty 0.38 0.10%

Open Plots 0.047 0.01%

Rivers 1.89 0.50%

Main Roads 3.94 1.04%

Saltpans 36.65 9.69%

Railway 0.05 0.01%

Settlements 1.88 0.50%

Treeclad Areas 6.53 1.73%

Wasteland 11.33 3.00%

Waterbodies 0.58 0.15%

Grand Total 378.3188728 100.00%



Figure No.3.6.1: Land Use Map



3.7 SOIL QUALITY

8 samples were collected from different locations within 10 km radius to assess the base line status of soil.

Analysis was also carried out for physico-chemical parameters as well as the parameters to define the texture

class. Soil samples were collected by using core cutter and brought to the laboratory in polythene bags.

Standard procedures have been followed for soil sampling and analysis. Soil sampling locations are presented

in Figure No. 3.1.1 and tabulated in Table No. 3.1.1.

Soil from the studied location was mainly clay loam having hard texture. Results are presented in Table. No.

3.7.1 & Table No. 3.7.2.

Figure No.3.7.1: Soil Sampling Photographs

Ambetha Luvara



Table No.3.7.1: Results of Soil Samples (Mar’16 to May’16)

Sr.

No. Parameters Unit Project Site Lakhigam

Birla

Copper

Jetty

Luvara Dahej Salt Pan

Area Jageshwar

Ambetha

1 pH -- 7.04

7.82 7.96 7.93 8.02 7.74 7.78 7.66

2 Moisture % 9.8

9.1 8.9 8.5 10.3 9.0 9.4 8.8

3 Organic (Loss on

ignition) %

0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.4 0.3

4 Calcium meq/100g 19.6

18.7 18.1 20.2 19.9 18.8 20.4 19.9

5 Magnesium meq/100g 11.6

11.2 10.5 11.2 13.3 9.7 12.7 11.9

6 Sodium meq/100g 11.65

10.33 12.56 10.31 15.55 11.30 11.92 9.33

7 Potassium meq/100g 1.23

1.46 1.23 1.01 1.53 1.28 1.26 1.00

8 Cation Exchange

Capaity meq/100g

44.1 41.7 42.4 42.7 50.3 41.1 46.3 42.1

9 SAR - 4.2

3.8 4.7 3.7 5.4 4.2 4.1 3.3

10 ESP % 26.4

24.8 29.6 24.1 30.9 27.5 25.8 22.1

11 Total Phosphorus mg/100 g 6.0

6.7 7.8 6.7 4.8 5.8 5.2 6.5

12 Total Nitrogen mg/100 g 8.0

6.7 8.1 6.9 8.3 9.8 9.6 6.8

13 Nitrate mg/100 g 4.0

2.7 4.0 2.8 2.8 5.6 4.1 4.1

14 Zinc mg/100 g 1.75

1.25 1.51 1.04 0.91 1.18 0.90 0.64

15 Copper mg/100 g 1.5

0.7 1.2 0.4 0.3 1.0 0.3 0.4

16 Iron mg/100 g 87.7

38.1 75.4 35.8 39.8 61.1 36.4 32.6

17 Chromium mg/100 g 0.03

<0.03 0.03 <0.03 <0.03 0.03 <0.03 <0.03

18 Boron gm/cc 0.14

0.02 0.04 0.10 0.05 0.09 0.12 0.10

Table No.3.7.2: Soil Texture analysis (Mar’16 to May’16)

Sr.

No. Parameters Project Site Lakhigam

Birla Copper

Jetty Luvara Dahej Salt Pan Area Jageshwar

Ambetha

1 Texture Clay Clay Clay

Clay Clay Clay Clay Clay

2 Sand% 23.1 23.0 22.5 23.8 24.0 22.5 22.9 23.3

3 Silt % 7.1 8.9 8.5 9.3 11.4 7.6 9.5 11.8

4 Clay% 69.9 68.1 69.0 66.9 64.7 69.9 67.5 64.9



3.7.1 SUMMARY OF SOIL QUALITY

The following interpretation is made based on visual observation & the average test results found during the study period.

Results of pH were varying in narrow range for one location to other location from 7.04 to 8.02 during

the study period. Overall the pH of all the soil samples was found almost neutral.

Loss on ignition test was also carried out to know the probability of Organic matter in the soil samples.

Concentration of organic matter was found in the range of 0.3 to 0.5%. Minimum Value was observed

in the samples of Project Site, Luvara & Ambetha village.

During analysis concentration of total Nitrogen was found in the range of 6.7 to 9.8 mg/100 gm.

Minimum value was observed in the soil sample of Lakhigam village.

SAR value has also been calculated during the survey and it was found in the range of 3.3 to 5.4.

Total Phosphorous content was found in the range of 4.8 to 7.8 mg/100gm.

Average Calcium content ranged from 18.1 to 20.4 meq/100 gm and magnesium content ranged from

9.7 to 13.3 meq/100 gm.

As a micronutrient analysis of Iron, Chromium, copper & Boron was also carried out for all the soil

samples & their presence was also noted.

3.7.2 INTERPRETATION OF SOIL DATA

On the basis of the above test result for chromium and loss on ignition test, it is interpreted that soil of the

studied locations are not affected due to industrial discharge of effluent or solid waste disposal. Soils of the

studied locations are clay soil. This type of soil is having low porosity with hard texture. Such type of soil does

not favour the crops pattern. This type of soil can be utilized for the cultivation of cotton, pulses and trees

having the adaptation with saline soil.



3.8 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Water is vital for all known forms of life. It is a precondition for human, animal and plant life as well as an

indispensable resource for the economy. Water plays a fundamental role in climate regulation cycle. Current

scenario shows that large population is deprived of access to water and if they might have this access, the water

may be polluted with many contaminants. In the future, we will probably find that clean water will be a rare and

high price commodity.

Most water resources are being influenced by human activities. Among these, industrial activities are the major

pressure on water environment. The growing population and industrial demands for development and welfare

or improvement further increases the pressure on these resources. As a result water resources are getting

contaminated and making the adverse impact on aquatic life. Ensuring a sustained use and avoiding closure of

development options requires in depth knowledge of physical, chemical and biological responses to human

interference and robust prediction tools for the evaluation and optimization of proposed development and

abatement schemes.

Physical, chemical and biological factors influencing water quality are so interrelated that a change in any water

quality parameter may trigger other changes in a complete network of interrelated variables. Selected water

quality parameters for surface and ground water resources along with biological indicators within study region

have been used for water environment and assessing the impact on it by proposed project. A study on water

environment aspects of ecosystem plays an important role in environmental assessment to identify water related

sensitive issues.

3.8.1 RECONNAISSANCE

As a significant part of predefined framework of the present study water samples were collected from selected

locations. The Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized based on:

Presence, Location and uses of major water bodies in the region

Type and Location of Industrial/residential areas, their intake and effluent disposal locations

Likely area that can represent baseline conditions

3.8.2 WATER QUALITY

With the start of water quality study, the water resources in the study area were divided into three categories for

getting ideal upshot of baseline status of water quality of the region. These three categories as determined are:

Ground water resources (tube well, open well, springs etc.)

Surface water resources including streams, nalas, ponds,river, canals.

Marine water



3.8.3 SAMPLING & ANALYSIS

All the water samples were collected and analyzed as per ―Standard Methods for Examination of Water &

Wastewater‖, APHA 22nd

edition, 2012. Water Samples for the analysis of physico-chemical parameters were

collected in plastic carboy and parameter wise preserved onsite as per the technique defined in the book of

APHA, 22nd

edition, 2012. Temperature, pH and DO were analyzed onsite and samples were brought to the

laboratory for the analysis of remaining parameters.

3.8.4 GROUND WATER RESOURCES

At the time of location selection, 8 nos. of locations were selected but during the sampling it was observed that

most of the villages have not the facility to take ground water sample. To assess the quality of ground water,

samples were collected from 5 locations for the analysis of physico-chemical and microbiological parameters.

Frequency of sampling was twice in a month during the study period.

Sampling locations are tabulated in Table No.3.8.1 and Figure No.3.8.1 and its analysis report is presented in

Table No 3.8.2.



Figure No. 3.8.1: Map showing the study region with locations for Ground Water

Table No. 3.8.1 Details of Ground Water sampling locations

Sr. No. Location Distance Direction with reference

to Project Site

01. Project Site - -

02. Lakhigam Approx. 2.0 km SE

03. Luvara Approx. 3.5 km SW

04. Dahej Approx. 4.0 km S

05. Ambetha Approx. 5.0 km SE



Figure No 3.8.2Ground Water Sampling Photographs

Ambetha (Bore Well) Dahej (Bore Well)

Lakhigam (Well)



Table No. 3.8.2 Ground water Analysis Report (Mar’16 – May’16)

Sr.

No. Parameters Unit

Project

Site Lakhigam Luvara Dahej Ambetha

1. Temperature 0C 27 24 28 27 27

2. pH pH Unit 7.83 7.62 7.40 7.26 7.28

3. Colour Pt.Co.scale <05 <05 <05 <05 <05

4. Odour -- Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

5. TDS mg/L 13010 285 670 1612 2340

6. Conductivity µmho/cm 21100 430 970 2380 3480

7. Turbidity NTU 18.5 0.4 4.6 24 4

8. Total Hardness mg/L 1810 135 290 480 672

9. Calcium mg/L 126 24 100 66 61

10. Total Alkalinity mg/L 1430 118 296 496 610

11. Chloride mg/L 612 80 180 612 890

12. Magnesium mg/L 363 18 10 77 126

13. Sulphate mg/L 1091 2.5 15 64 112

14. Total Phosphorus

(PO4-P)

mg/L 10.8 0.43 1.80 0.60 0.50

15. Sodium mg/L 3980 54 120 380 440

16. Potassium mg/L 710 15 15 120 350

17. Fluoride mg/L 1.0 1.7 0.6 1.0 1.6

18. Phenolic Comp. mg/L Nil Nil NIL Nil NIL

19. Oil & Grease mg/L <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

20. Dissolved oxygen mg/L 4.3 5.3 4.5 5.6 6.2

21. COD mg/L 10 <4 6 <4 <4

22. BOD(3daysat270C) mg/L 4 <4 <4 <4 <4

23. Nitrate mg/L 1.1 0.3 0.8 0.8 2.2

24. Total Nitrogen mg/L 1.7 0.8 1.1 1.1 3.4

25. Iron mg/L 0.5 0.12 0.2 0.08 0.02

26. Copper mg/L 0.07 0.08 0.06 <0.05 <0.05

27. Boron mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

28. Chromium mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

29. Zinc mg/L 0.10 <0.01 0.1 0.05 0.04

30. MPN No./100 ml NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL



Table No.3.8.3 Drinking Water Specification: IS: 10500, 1992(Reaffirmed 2012)

Sr. No. Parameter Unit Desirable Limit Permissible Limit

1 Temperature 0C -- --

2 pH pH Unit 6.5 – 8.5 No Relaxation

3 Colour Pt.Co.scale 5 15

4 Odour -- Agreeable --

5 TDS mg/L 500 2000

6 Turbidity NTU 5 10

7 Total Hardness mg/L 200 600

8 Calcium mg/L 75 200

9 Total Alkalinity mg/L 200 600

10 Chloride mg/L 250 1000

11 Magnesium mg/L 30 100

12 Sulphate mg/L 200 400

13 Phosphate mg/L -- --

14 Sodium mg/L -- --

15 Potassium mg/L -- --

16 Fluoride mg/L 1.0 1.5

17 Phenolic Comp. mg/L 0.001 0.002

18 Oil & Grease mg/L -- --

19 Dissolved oxygen mg/L -- --

20 COD mg/L -- --

21 BOD(3daysat270C) mg/L -- --

22 Iron mg/L 0.3 No Relaxation

23 Nitrate mg/L 45 No Relaxation

24 Copper mg/L 0.05 1.5

25 Boron mg/L 0.5 1.0

26 Total Chromium mg/L 0.05 No Relaxation

27 MPN No./100ml Nil Nil

3.8.5 SUMMARY OF GROUND WATER QUALITY



The test results were compared with the Drinking Water Specification: IS: 10500, 1992 (Reaffirmed 2012) & it

is summarized as under.

pH range was observed between7.26 -7.83 within the specified limit.

Total dissolved solids were recorded in the range of 285 to 13010 mg/L with minimum at Lakhigam and

maximum at project site. Results of TDS for project site and Ambetha village do not meet as per the

drinking water norms.

Total hardness was in the range of 135-1810 mg/L with minimum at Lakhigam village & maximum at

Project Site.

Total Alkalinity was found in the range of 118-1430 mg/L with minimum at Lakhigam village &

maximum at Project Site.

All the heavy metals were found well within the range of prescribed standards, found to be slightly

higher side. Fluoride was also within the range of prescribed limit in all the samples.

As microbiological parameters MPN analysis was also carried out and it was found Nil.

On the basis of test results it is summarized that water quality of Lakhigam, Luvara and Dahej meet

with the standard IS 10500 – 2012. Water can be used for drinking purpose except Project site and

Ambetha village in absence of alternate source.

3.8.6 INTERPRETATIONOF GROUND WATER QUALITY DATA

On the basis of test results obtained it is interpreted that results of Lakhigam, Luvara and Dahej meet with the

standard because of samples have been collected from dug well and these dug well are adjacent to pond, while

the results of Project site and Ambetha village are having high TDS, Total Hardness and Total Alkanility value

due to ingress of salinity. COD, BOD results indicate that ground water quality has not been affected by

industrial effluent discharge.



3.8.7 SURFACE WATER

At the time of location selection, 8 nos. of locations were selected but during the sampling it was observed that

most of the ponds are dried. Only water was available in the pond of Jageshwar village. To assess the quality

of Surface water, samples was collected from same village for the analysis of physico-chemical &

microbiological parameters. Frequency of sampling was once during the study period.

Sampling and analysis was carried out as per ―Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater

22nd

edition, 2012. Sampling location is tabulated in the Table No.3.8.4 and Figure No.3.8.3. Photograph

showing the dryness condition is also represented in Fig no. 8.3.3 for authentication purpose and analysis

report is presented in Table No.3.8.5 & 3.8.6.



Figure No.3.8.3Map showing the locations for Surface water

Table No. 3.8.4 Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations

Sr. No. Location Distance from the

project Site

Direction from the

Project Site

01 Jageshwar 4.5 SE



Figure No.3.8.4 Surface water sampling Photographs

Jageshwar



Table No. 3.8.5 Surface water Analysis Report (Mar’16 – May’16)

Sr. No. Parameter Unit Jageshwar

1. Temperature 0C 25

2. pH pH Unit 7.42

3. Colour Pt.Co.Scale 15

4. Odour -- Agreeable

5. TDS mg/L 340

6. Conductivity µmho/cm 530

7. TSS NTU 7

8. Total Hardness mg/L 130

9. Calcium mg/L 24

10. Total Alkalinity mg/L 115

11. Chloride mg/L 124

12. Magnesium mg/L 17

13. Sulphate mg/L 10

14. Total Phosphorus mg/L 1.8

15. Sodium mg/L 78

16. Potassium mg/L 14

17. Fluoride mg/L 0.7

18. Phenolic Comp. mg/L Nil

19. Oil & Grease mg/L <0.1

20. Dissolved oxygen mg/L 4.3

21. COD mg/L 18

22. BOD(3daysat270C) mg/L 8

23. Nitrate mg/L 0.3

24. Total Nitrogen mg/L 0.8

25. Iron mg/L 0.04

26. Copper mg/L <0.05

27. Boron mg/L <0.01

28. Chromium mg/L <0.03

29. Zinc mg/L 0.2



Table No.3.8.6 Bacteriological Analysis of surface Water (Mar’16– May’16)

Sr. No. Sampling

Location

Total

Coliforms F.Coliform E.coli F.Streptococci

Most Probable No (MPN): No/100 ml

1. Jageshwar 17 8 2 0

Table No.3.8.7 Inland Surface Water Classification (CPCB Standards)

Sr.

No. Characteristics

Class

A B C D E

1. Dissolved Oxygen, mg/L, Min 6 5 4 4 -

2. Biochemical Oxygen Demand, mg/ L Max 2 3 3 - -

3. Total Coliform Organisms*

MPN/100 ml, Max 50 500 5000 - -

4. Total Dissolved Solids mg/L Max 500 - 1500 - 2100

5. Chlorides (as CL), mg/L, Max 250 - 600 - 600

6. Colour, Hazen Units, Max 10 300 300 - -

7. Sodium Absorption Ratio, Max - - - - 26

8. Boron (as B) mg/L Max - - - - 2

9. Sulphates (as SO4), mg/L Max 400 - 400 - 1000

10. Nitrates (as NO3), mg/L Max 20 - 50 - -

11 Free Ammonia (as N), mg/L Max - - - 12 -

12. Conductivity at 250C, micromhos/cm, Max - - - 1000 2250

13. pH value 6.5-

8.5

6.5-

8.5

6.5-

8.5

6.5-

8.5

6.5-

8.5 14. Iron (as Fe), mg/l, Max 0.3 - 50 - -

15. Fluorides (as F), mg/L, Max 1.5 1.5 1.5 - -

16. Copper (as Cu), mg/L, Max 1.5 - 1.5 - -

* If the Coliform is found to be more than the prescribed tolerance limits, the criteria for Coliform shall be

satisfied if not more than 20 percent of samples show more than the tolerance limit specified, and not more than

5 percent of samples show values more than 4 times the tolerance limits. Further, the facal Coliform should not

be more than 20 percent of the Coliform.



Source: Indian Standard (IS: 2296 – 1982).

A‘ Drinking water surface without conventional treatment but after disinfection

B‘ Outdoor bathing (organized)

C‘ Drinking water source with conventional treatment followed by disinfection

D‘ Propagation of wild life, fisheries

E‘ Irrigation, industrial, cooling, controlled waste disposal

3.8.8 SUMMARY OF SURFACE WATER QUALITY

The following description is based on the analysis of the samples:

During the analysis pH of the samples was found 7.42.

TDS analysis was also carried out for surface water sample and it was found 340 mg/L.

DO measured during analysis was found 4.3 mg/L.

COD & BOD analysis was also carried out during the study period and it was found more than desirable

value for drinking water.

All other results were found within drinking water acceptable norms

MPN test was also carried out for this surface water sample and it was found positive. It indicates

towards the faecal contamination in surface water body.

Test results comparison study with Inland Surface Water Classification (CPCB Standards) reveals that

water cannot be used directly for drinking purpose as MPN and other microbial test were found positive.

This water can be used in washing and irrigation purpose. Bathing and drinking should not be allowed

for this water body without disinfection.

3.8.9 INTERPRETATION OF SURFACE WATER QUALITY DATA

On the basis of test result of pond water, it is interpreted that there is no impact on surface water body due to

industrial discharge. COD & BOD value were found slightly higher than the desired value; it may be due to

addition of organic matter by cattle, domestic usage and falling of leaves from tree on water body.



3.8.10 MARINE WATER

To assess the quality& impact on Marine due to industrial discharge, samples were collected from Gulf of

Khambhat in Arabian Sea near the effluent discharge point of Hindalco Industries Ltd. Frequency of sampling

was once during study period and samples were collected as per standard method for the examination of water

& wastewater APHA 22nd

Edition, 2012 to analyze the physico chemical, metal, biological & microbiological

parameters. Benthos and sediment sample were also collected from Gulf of Khambhat in Arabian Sea near the

discharge point.

Test results are presented in Table No.3.8.8 to 3.8.13.

Table No. 3.8.8 Marine Water Analysis Report

Sr.

No. Parameter Unit Low Tide High Tide

1. Temperature oC 29 30

2. pH pH-Unit 7.39 7.38

3. Colour Pt.Co.scale 10 15

4. Odour -- Unobjectionable Unobjectionable

5. Salinity As Nacl - 35200 34500

6. Total Hardness mg/L 4120 3660

7. Calcium mg/L 180 156

8. Total Alkalinity mg/L 232 216

9. TSS mg/L 415 524

10. Magnesium mg/L 892 843

11. Sulphate- - mg/L 1005 927

12. Total Phosphorus

( PO4-p) mg/L 0.3 0.2

13. Fluoride mg/L 0.8 0.7

14. Phenolic Comp. mg/L NIL NIL

15. Oil & Grease mg/L <0.1 <0.1

16. Dissolved oxygen mg/L 4.4 5.1

17. COD mg/L 22 12

18. BOD(3daysat270C) mg/L 5 <4

19. Nitrate mg/L Nil Nil

20. Total Nitrogen mg/L 0.3 Nil

21. Iron mg/L 1.03 0.51

22. Copper mg/L 0.52 0.07

23. Boron mg/L 0.08 0.06

24. Chromium mg/L 0.065 <0.03

25. Zinc mg/L 0.2 0.1



Table No. 3.8.9 Microbiological Analysis Report for Marine Water Sample

Sr.

No. Sampling Location

MPN F. coliform E.Coli Streptococci

No./100ml

01. Low Tide 56 31 14 5

02. High Tide 62 37 15 7

Table No. 3.8.10 Zooplankton Analysis Report for Marine Water Sample

Sr.

No.

Sampling

during

Total Count

per m3

Percentage of Organism in each group

Protozoa Rotifera Copepoda

01. Low Tide 6100 68 10 22

02. High Tide 7200 74 8 18

Table No. 3.8.11 Pigment Analysis and Phytoplanktoncell count for Marine Water Sample

Sr.

No

Sampling

Condition

Chlorophyll – a

mg/m3

Pheophytin

mg/m3

Cell Count

Unit/L

1. Low Tide 1.86 2.16 460

2. High Tide 1.94 2.38 510



Table No. 3.8.12 Benthos Detail

Systematic Group Results

Polychaetes +

Mysides _

Ostracodes +

Isopodes +

Amphipodes +

Decapodes +

Gastropodes +

Brachyurans +

Pelycypodes +

Crustaceans +

Bivalves -

Oligochaetes +

Echinodermates -

Note : + denotes present and – denotes Absent

Table No. 3.8.13 Sediment Quality Analysis

Sr.

No.

Sampling

During

Total

Phosphorous

mg/g

Cr

mg/g

Mn

mg/g

Fe

mg/g

Zn

mg/g

Cu

mg/g

Loss on

ignition%

01. Arabian Sea 3.6 2.6 2.6 212 1.6 3.5 0.4



3.8.11 SUMMARY OF MARINE WATER QUALITY

Temperature is an important parameter, which affects the living organisms. The temperature of the

water was less than ambient air temperature.

The pH variation was observed in a narrow range of 7.38 to 7.39. pH range is maintained due to

buffering action of CO2,CO3-2

and HCO3-2

.

Salinity was observed in the range of 34500 to 35200 mg/L which is near to the expected value.

DO is an essential parameter which affects the biotic component of the water. Fish and other aquatic

life take oxygen through the gill. DO levels affect the aerobic bacterial population as well as

chlorophyllous Phytoplankton. During study period maximum DO level was recorded up to 4.4 mg/L

during low tide which is as per expected value.

BOD is also an important parameter to define the environmental scenario of marine ecosystem as it

affects the DO level. BOD was found in the range of <4 to 5 mg/L. During Low tide BOD reaches up

to 5 mg/L while it <4 mg/L for High tide. Result of BOD during low tide is more than expected value

due to Industrial discharge.

Iron varies from 0.51 to 1.03 mg/L. Minimum value for Iron was recorded during High tide. Other

Heavy metals were found well within the range.

Microbiological and biological analysis was also carried out for marine water sample. Results for

microbiological parameters show that marine water is contaminated with animal as well as human fecal

matter.

3.8.12 INTERPRETATION OF MARINE WATER QUALITY DATA

On the basis of test results for the Parameter COD, BOD and Iron found during low tide, it is interpreted that

Marine water is being more or less contaminated due to Industrial discharge. It has been observed that all the

results for the above said parameters are within the desired range during high tide. This shows that discharge

contamination is not more than the self-purification capacity of water body, so there is a need to avoid

discharging of effluent beyond the limit given by the GPCB.

3.9 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY

Ecology is the scientific study of the relations that living organisms have with respect to each other and their

natural environment. Producer, consumer and decomposer govern whole cycle of ecology. Plant and animal

both are interdependent to each other. Producer is necessary for each consumer. Plant plays their role in



ecology as producer. Plant, animals and microorganism together with the environment in which they live make

an independent unit called the Ecosystem.

Mainly two types of Vegetation cover are on the earth surface. One is self-growing and another is cultivated.

Plants are renewable resource and useful to living organism in many ways. It is therefore the role of man in

manipulating and changing vegetation population. Due to lack of awareness deforestation is occurring which in

turn is responsible for imbalance of ecosystem.

The main objective of the ecological survey is aimed to find out baseline status of flora and fauna of the study

region. An ecological survey of the study area was conducted particularly with reference to listing of species

and assessment of the existing baseline ecological (terrestrial and marine ecosystem) conditions in the study

area.

3.9.1 METHODOLOGY ADOPTED FOR THE STUDY OF FLORA & FAUNA

The importance of primary data collection in all ecological work cannot be over-emphasized as without good

survey data. Before starting the survey, Toposheet of study area was taken from client to decide the survey area

and sampling spot points. Secondary data information was also collected for desktop study purpose and

preparing the list of probable flora and fauna and taking photographs from forest department, ZSI, BSI,

different Taxonomy books, internet and literature published by government of Gujarat. Information about fishes

was collected from local people, fisheries department Bharuch and by visual observation.

Data Collection: Following steps were considered for the collection of secondary data and generation of

primary data while carrying out ecological survey of the study area.

Step 1: Defining the study area

The study area was larger than the development site as it included adjacent areas that might be directly or

indirectly affected by the proposal.

Step 2: Stratifying the site

When designing a field survey, the study area was stratified (i.e. divide the area into relatively homogenous

units - often referred to as 'environmental sampling units' or 'stratification units'). Stratified sampling provides a

logical, objective and efficient method of undertaking surveys and ensures that the full range of potential

habitats and vegetation types will be systematically sampled.

Step 3: Visiting the site

A preliminary site visit was conducted by our in-house field area experts to refine the initial stratification units,

determine the vegetation types present at the site, assess the vegetation condition and conduct a habitat

assessment.



Step 4: Floristic survey

Floristic survey was conducted by adopting the method point centered quadrate sampling and visual

observation. Vegetation measurement was done from points rather than in an area with boundaries. Faunal

survey was conducted by adopting the method opportunistic observation/ species list method/direct sighting

/intensive search/ bird calls and conformation with local public.

Fig. No. 3.9.1: Photograph of Flora & Avifauna

Ambetha village (Flora) Lakhigam village (Flora)

Dahej village (Flora) Dahej village (Avifauna)



Ambetha village (Flora) Ambetha village (Flora)

Dahej village (Fauna) Dahej village (Fauna)



Observations:

Main crops of the study region are cotton and pulses. During survey natural flora of study region were found in

degraded condition or under stress due to extensive industrialization. No distinct variation was observed in

vegetation covered of study region. Vegetation near villages and along the road was represented by trees and

shrubs. Dominant vegetation of a study area was Bushes. Flora and fauna detail is presented in Fig. No. 3.9.1

and Table No. 3.9.1(floral)

Table No. 3.9.1

Scientific name Common Name

Tree

Acacia auriculiformis Bengali Baval

Acacia nilotica Desi Baval

Aegle marmelos Bili

Ailanthas excels Ardusa

Alangium salvifolium Ankol

Albizzia odoratissima Kalo Siras

Albizzia procera Killai (kelvo)

Azadirachta indica Limdo

Bauhinia purpurea Kachnar

Butea monosperma Khakhro

Cassia fistula Garmalo

Casuarina equisetifolia Sharu

Cordia gharaf Gundi

Dalbergia sissoo Sissoo

Eucalyptus species Nilgiri

Ficus bengalensis Vad

Ficus glomerata Umero

Ficus religiosa Pipdo

Morus alba Shetur

Phoenix sylvestris Khajuri

Pithecellobium dulce Mithi Amli (Goras Amli)

Pongomia pinnata Karanj

Prosopis juliflora Gando Baval

Syzygium cumunii Jambudo

Tamarindus indica Amli

Terminalia bellerica Behdo

Terminalia cranulata Sadad

Terminalia catappa Badam

Zizyphus mauritiana Bor

Zizyphus xylopyrus Ghat Bor

Climbers

Ampelocissus latfolia Jungli

Bougainvillea spectabilis Bougainvelia



Cucurbita maxima Kolu

Tinospora cordifolia Gulvel

Shrubs

Abubutilon indicum Khapat

Rosa Damascena Rose

Barleria prionitis Kapas

Calotropis procera Akdo

Carissa conjesta Karmada

Cirtus limon Limbu

Clerodendron incerne Vilayati Mendi

Datura metel Dhanturo

Dendrophthoe falcate Vando

Hibiscus rosa-sinensis Jasud

Hibiscus vitifolius Van Kapas

Lantana carnara Lantana

Lawsonia inermis Mendi

Nerium indicum Karen

Nyctanthus arbortristis Parijatak

Riccinus communis Divelo (Erandi)

Tephrosia purpurea Sartankho

Thespesia lampas Paras Piplo

Thespesia populnea Paras Piplo

Zizyphus nummularia Chanibor

Zizyphus oenoplia Boydino velo

Herbs

Argemone mexicana Darudi

Aerva sanguinolenta Karadia

Achyranthes aspera Anghedi

Arachis hypogea Mungfali F

Catharanthus roseus Barmasi

Cassia tora Kunvandio

Capsicum annum Marchi

Centella asiatica Bhrami

Datura metel Ganthovalo Dhanturo

Hibiscus lobatus Tali

Ipomoea aquatica Forsk Mali Ni Bhaji

Melilotus Jangli Methi

Musa paradisiacal Kela

Ocimum sanctum Tulsi

Phyllanthus fraternus Bhonya Amli

Source: Primary Survey



FAUNA

In absence of dense vegetation cover wild mammalian density was observed very less. No schedule I species was

recorded during survey. However three striped squirrels, rats, mongoose and other domestic animals were seen during

survey. Crow, pigeon, house sparrow and peacock was observed in terrestrial area and in Birla Copper premises.

Presence of reptilians was confirmed by local villagers. Water bodies were inhabited by birds like Egrets, Herons and

Kingfishers. Fisheries details have been collected from fisheries department and local fisherman for Dahej region.

List of fauna detail is given in Table No. 3.9.2

Table No. 3.9.2 Details of Wild Life

Common Name Scientific Name Vernacular

Name

Status (Red Data Book

Category)

A. Mammals

Common langur Semnpithecus entellus Vandra Not Evaluated (NE)

Common mongoose Herpestes edwardsi Nurulia, Noria Least Concern

Grey musk shrew Suncus murinus Chhuchhundar Least Concern

Three striped squirrel Funambulus penanti Khiskoli Not Evaluated (NE)

Rat Rattus rattus - Least Concern

Mouse Mus musculus - Least Concern

Mole Talpa europaea - Least Concern

Bat Chiroptera - Least Concern

Buffalo Bubalus bubalis - Least Concern

Cow Bos taurus - Least Concern

Goat Capra aegagrus

hircus

hircus

- Least Concern

Dog Canis lupus familiaris - Least Concern

Donkey Equus africanus

asinus -

Least Concern

B. Birds

Indian pond heron Ardeola grayii - Least Concern

Cattle egret Bubulcus ibis - Least Concern

Little egret Egretta garzetta - Least Concern

Indian reef heron Egretta gularis - Least Concern

Black ibis Pseudibis papillosa - Least Concern

Blackwinged kite Elanus caeruleus - Least Concern

Common pariah kite Milvus migrans govinda Samadi Least Concern

Jungle bush quail Perdicula asiatica Vana lavari Least Concern

Common peafowl Pavo cristatus Mor Least Concern

Red-wattled lapwing Vanellus indicus Titodi Least Concern

Yellow-wattled

lapwing

Vanellus malabaricus Titodi Least Concern

Little ringed plover Charadrius dubius - Least Concern

Green sandpiper Tringa ochropus Leeli tutvari Least Concern



Blackwinged stilt Himantopus

himantopus

- Least Concern

Small Indian pratincole Glareola lactea - Least Concern

Indian river tern Sterna aurantia - Near Threatened

Blue rock pigeon Columba livia Parevun Least Concern

Indian ring dove Streptopelia decaocto Dhol Least Concern

Spotted dove Streptopelia chinensis Vana holi Not Evaluated (NE)

Roseringed parakeet Psittacula krameri Sudo, Popat Least Concern

Blossomheaded

parakeet

Psittacula

cyanocephala

Tui, Popat Near Threatened

Indian cuckoo Cuculus micropterus - Least Concern

Koel Eudynamys

scolopacea

Koyal Least Concern

Jungle owlet Glaucidium radiatum Ghubad Least Concern

Spotted owlet Athene brama Chibri Least Concern

Common Indian

nightjar

Caprimulgus

asiaticus

Deshi chhapo Least Concern

Common kingfisher Alcedo atthis Lagothi Least Concern

Whitebreasted

kingfisher

Halcyon smyrnensis Kalkaliyo Least Concern

Green bee-eater Merops orientalis Nano patrangiyo Least Concern

Indian roller Coracias

benghalensis

Nilkant Least Concern

Malabar crested lark Galerida malabarica - Least Concern

Common swallow Hirundo rustica - Least Concern

Redrumped swallow Hirundo daurica Kenchi ababil Least Concern

Golden oriole Oriolus oriolus Peelak Least Concern

Blackheaded oriole Oriolus xanthornus - Least Concern

Black drongo Dicrurus adsimilis Kalo koshi Least Concern

Brahminy myna Sturnus pagodarum - Least Concern

Indian myna Acridotheres tristis Kabar Least Concern

Bank myna Acridotheres

ginginianus

Kabar Least Concern

Jungle myna Acridotheres fuscus Vana kabar Least Concern

House crow Corvus splendens Kagdo Least Concern

Redvented bulbul Pycnonotus cafer Bulbul Least Concern

Common babbler Turdoides caudatus Sheradi Least Concern

Jungle babbler Turdoides striatus Vana laledo Least Concern

Tailor bird Orthotomus sutorius Darjido Least Concern

Striated marsh warbler Megalurus palustris - Least Concern

Magpie robin Copsychus saularis Daiyad Least Concern

Indian robin Saxicoloides fulicata Deoli Least Concern

Orangeheaded ground

thrush

Zoothera citrina Malagir kasturo Least Concern

Yellowcheeked tit Parus xanthogenys - Least Concern

Yellow wagtail Motacilla flava

melanogrisea

Matano pilakya Least Concern

Purple sunbird Nectarinia asiatica Phul chakli Least Concern

Yellowbacked sunbird Aethopyga siparaja - Least Concern

House sparrow Passer domesticus Chakli Least Concern

Baya Ploceus philippinus Sughari Least Concern

Peacock Pavo cristatus Mor Schedule-1



C. Reptiles

Indian pond terrapin Melanochelys trijuga

trijuga

Kasaba Lower Risk

Northern house gecko Hemidactylus

flaviviridis

Garoli Least Concern

Common garden lizard Calotes versicolor Kachindo Not Evaluated (NE)

Forest calotes Calotes rouxi Kachindo Not Evaluated (NE)

Southern green calotes Calotes calotes Kachindo Not Evaluated (NE)

Fan-throated lizard Sitana ponticeriana - Least Concern

Indian chameleon Chameleon zeylanicus Sarado Not Evaluated (NE)

Common ratsnake Ptyas mucosus Dhaman Not Evaluated (NE)

Indian cobra Naja naja Nag Vulnerable

D. Invertebrates

Leech Hirudinaria

granulose

Leech Not Evaluated (NE)

Earth Worm Megascolex mauripii Earth Worm Not Evaluated (NE)

The garden spider Araneus diadematus The garden

spider

Not Evaluated (NE)

House Cricket Acheta domestica House Cricket Not Evaluated (NE)

Dragon Fly Anax janius Dragon Fly Not Evaluated (NE)

Fly Glossina palpalis Fly Not Evaluated (NE)

Cockroach Periplaneta

americana

Cockroach Not Evaluated (NE)

Honey bee Apis mellificia Honey bee Not Evaluated (NE)

Source: Primary Survey

Table No.3.9.3 Details of Fishes

Sr.

No.

Species Sr. No. Species

Marine Fishes

1 White Pomfret 11 Indian Salmon

2 Blach Pomfret 12 Ribbon Fish

3 Bombay Duck 13 Silverbar

4 Thread Fin 14 Eel

5 Jew Fish 15 Smallscineldies

6 Clupeids 16 Prawans (M)

7 Coilia 17 Prawns (J)

8 Shark 18 Crab

9 Mullet 19 Levta

10 Cat Fish 20 Leather Jacket

Inland Fishes

1 Catla 10 Mullet

2 Rohu 11 Fel

3 Mrigal 12 Shrimps

4 Kalbasu 13 Prawns (M)

5 Minor Crap 14 Prawns (J)

6 Vallagoattu 15 Bekti

7 Scorpion 16 Crab

8 Murrel 17 Levta

9 Cut Fish 18 Mahseer Source: Primary Survey



INTERPRETATION ON ECOLOGY:

The soil of study region is clay soil and it is also affected with salinity. It does not favor the growth of plant and

crops. Dominant flora of the study region is bangali baval, gando baval and desi babool. Area is not rich with

floral diversity. Natural vegetation of study area is in degraded condition and wild mammal‘s density is also

very low.

3.10 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

Socioeconomics (also known as socio-economics or social economics) is the social science that studies

how economic activity affects social processes. In general it analyzes how societies progress, stagnate,

or regress because of their local or regional economy, or the global economy.

In order to assess and evaluate the likely impacts arising out of any new or existing projects in Socio-economic

environment, it is necessary to gauge the apprehension of the people in the surrounding areas. Socio-economic

survey serves as an effective tool for fulfilling this requirement.

The rapid industrialization of the study region has greatly influenced the socio economic and health

environment in the villages. Increasing industrialization and population density has increased pressure on

resources, civic amenities and public infrastructure. Economic conditions of the local people have improved

with the increasing industrialization and greater employment opportunities.

The Socio Economic environment includes demography structure, Population density, literacy Level, and

employment levels. The data establish a baseline for the prediction of likely impacts of the proposed activity on

the socio economic environment. Secondary information pertaining to the study area villages was collected

from Government Agencies, Census data for the year 2001 & 2011, and statistical abstracts to compile the

socio economic data.

3.10.1 SOCIO-ECONOMIC SURVEY METHODOLOGY

Socio-economic survey tools provide a means of improving understanding of local resource management

systems, resource use and the relative importance of resources for households and villages. They can also be

used to elicit insights on interaction with government decision-making systems, community perceptions of

trends and priority issues, and community-based institutions and their role in the sustainable use and

conservation of natural resources.

Data Collection: Following steps were considered for the collection of primary data:

1. Identification of Study Area: The study area was identified before carrying out the survey. All the related

information which could affect the prosperity, development & literacy were also collected.



2. Site Visit: Location wise survey plan & format for data collection were prepared for site visit. Data

regarding Land Characteristics, Population, Literacy, Workers and Amenities were collected during the survey.

Analysis of Data: The data collected by primary survey were verified with secondary data collected from

sources likeGovernment Agencies, Census data for the year 2001 and 2011, and statistical abstracts.

3.10.2 DEMOGRAPHY

Almost all Villages in the Study Area are experiencing a rapid growth of population due to industrialization.

The total Population of study region is summarized in Table No. 3.10.1.

3.10.3 POPULATION DENSITY

Population density in the study area varies from 102 – 464 person/sq. km. Details of the same are tabulated in

Table No. 3.10.1.

Table No. 3.10.1 Details of Population in Study Area

Villages No. of Household Total population Total area

Hector

Population density

Person/sq.km

Lakhigam 1217 4938 1063.3 464

Luvara 385 1663 890.5 187

Dahej 3426 13495 7630.5 177

Jageshwar 383 1571 515 305

Ambetha 347 1552 1516.1 102

Suva 413 1920 1283.5 150

Vadadala 201 822 679.1 121

Vav 155 727 643.5 113

Kadodara 420 1995 1325.2 151

Padariya 131 647 539.4 120

3.10.4 SEX RATIO

The sex ratio i.e. the number of females per 1000 males is in range of 812- 988 with lowest in Kadodara and

highest in Lakhigam. The Sex ratio i.e. the number of females per 1000 males indirectly reveals certain

sociological aspect in relation to female births, infant mortality among female children. Details of the same are

tabulated in Table No. 3.10.2.



Table No. 3.10.2: Details of Sex Ratio in Study Area

Zone of Study Male

Population

Female

Population

Total

Population

Sex Ratio

(Female to 1000 Male)

Lakhigam 482 476 958 988

Luvara 607 563 1170 928

Dahej 686 660 1346 962

Jageshwar 823 786 1609 955

Ambetha 671 615 1286 917

Suva 349 343 692 983

Vadadala 226 217 443 960

Vav 462 428 890 926

Kadodara 1360 1203 2563 812

Padariya 431 399 830 926

3.10.5 LITERACY RATE

The literacy level of the study area is summarized in Table No. 3.10.3and graphically presented in Figure

No.3.10.2.

Table No. 3.10.3 Details of Literacy Rate in Study Area

Village Literate Literacy (%)

Male Female Total Male Female Total

Lakhigam 2679 1287 3966 85.21 71.74 80.32

Luvara 672 525 1197 76.98 66.46 71.98

Dahej 6704 3266 9970 80.34 63.42 73.88

Jageshwar 683 617 1300 83.50 81.94 82.75

Ambetha 677 537 1214 83.89 72.08 78.22

Suva 783 644 1427 80.47 68.00 74.32

Vadadala 331 271 602 79.00 67.25 73.24

Vav 324 251 575 85.71 71.92 79.09

Kadodara 801 568 1369 78.68 58.14 68.62

Padariya 293 205 498 86.18 66.78 76.97



Figure No. 3.10.2: Graph of Literacy Rate

Among all the villages of study area Padariya having high Male literacy rate i.e. 86.18 %. There is not much

difference between female literacy rate and male literacy rate in the study region. Female literacy rate is an

important indicator for social change.

3.10.6 ECONOMIC ASPECTS

Economic aspects of the study area include the economical structure of the people of the surrounding area. It

can be predicted that economic structure of the study area will be improved with time, because it consists large

industrial estate and hence there are more employment opportunities.

According to working status, whole population of the study area is divided into,

Marginal workers

Non workers

Main workers

Census department has defined 10 categories of workers in Main workers. It consists of cultivators,

agricultural, labourer those engaged in livestock, forestry, fishing, mining and quarrying, manufacturing,

processing and repairs in household industries and other services. Workers engaged in the work for a period

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

% o

f Li

tera

cy

Villages

Literacy (%) Male Literacy (%) Female Literacy (%) Total



less than 6 month during the reference year falls under marginal workers. Workers engaged in unpaid

household duties e.g. students, retired person, dependents etc. falls under non-workers. Detail of occupational

structure is shown in Table No. 3.10.4.

Table No.3.10.4 Details of Occupational Structure

Zone of Study Non-Workers (%) Total Workers

Main Workers (%) Marginal Workers (%)

Lakhigam 53.2 44.1 2.7

Luvara 60.6 38.3 1.1

Dahej 61.7 33.2 5.1

Jageshwar 69.5 29.6 0.9

Ambetha 68.9 15.1 16.0

Suva 72.8 15.8 11.5

Vadadala 59.0 36.9 4.1

Vav 64.6 32.7 2.6

Kadodara 55.5 29.0 15.4

Padariya 53.8 36.3 9.9

Lakhigam has significant employment i.e. 44.1 % as main workers, while the lowest employment as main

workers in Ambetha i.e. 15.1%. Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-workers. Rapid

industrialization in the last two decades has resulted in significant changes in the occupational profile of the

local people. There is an overall trend among the youth to opt for employment in service sector and move away

from traditional occupation.



Figure No. 3.10.3 Occupational Structure of Study Area

3.10.6 INTERPRETATION OF SOCIO ECONOMIC DATA:

During the primary survey it was observed that almost pakka road facility is available in all villages within 10

km radius. Literacy rate of the study region is from 58.14 to 86.18%. On the basis of survey for literacy rate

data it is interpreted that there is need to promote educate more and more people.

Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-workers. It indicates that the problem of

unemployment can be solved by providing proper training and education. There is also need to establish more

industries so that maximum number of employment can be generated.

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

Lakhigam Luvara Dahej Jageshwar Ambetha Suva Vadadala Vav Kadodara Padariya

% o

f W

ork

ers

Villages

Non Workers (%) Total Workers Main Workers(%) Total Workers Marginal Workers (%)



CHAPTER-4

IMPACT PREDICTION & MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 GENERAL

As a part of the EIA study, anticipated environmental impacts associated with the proposed expansion have

been identified. Various activities during the construction & operation phase of the proposed expansion, which

are likely to cause an impact on various environmental components, have been listed. For evaluation of

impacts due to the proposed expansion, the baseline data has been utilized. Changes in the environmental

parameters and their impacts-whether short term or long term, positive or negative, reversible or irreversible

have been identified & predicted.

For the purpose of identification, prediction and quantification of the impacts due to the proposed expansion,

impact assessment task was performed for both Construction as well as Operational stage. All possible care

was taken for the assessment of temporary, short term, long term, direct, indirect as well as reversible and

irreversible impacts for identifying the nature of impacts. The impacts caused by activities of the construction

phase will be temporary in nature and restricted to a period of construction phase only. The chapter contains

the probable effects likely to occur due to Construction & Operational activities of the proposed expansion.

The description is also illustrated in tabular form, which is commonly known as ―Impact matrix‖.

List of activities corresponding to the proposed expansion have been taken into consideration for generation of

cause-condition-effect networks. This type of method has been basically advantageous in recognizing the

series of impacts that would be triggered by the proposed activities. The method has proved in providing a

―road map‖ type of approach for the identification of primary, secondary as well as tertiary levels of impacts.

4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL FACETS & PARAMETERS

For the purpose of assessment of anticipated environmental impacts, some environmental facets/regimes were

selected considering the probable impacts. Further, for an in-depth study and assessment of impacts various

parameters were selected. The environmental facets/regimes for existing & proposed scenario along with the

parameters selected for the study are as below:

I. Air Environment

Emission Sources & Quantity

Emission Control Measures/Technology



Environment, Health & Safety Management Strategies

Emission & Ambient Air Quality

II. Water Environment

Water Consumption & Wastewater generation

Water & Wastewater Management System/Technology

Environment, Health & Safety Management Strategies

Water & Wastewater Quality

III. Land Environment

Potential of Land use & Land cover change

Potential of Land Contamination, Sources & Control Measures

Potential Change in Soil Quality

IV. Ecology

Biotic Components (Flora & Fauna) of the area

Change in Habitat and Vegetation

Control Measures, Ecological & Environment Management Strategies

V. Socio Economic Environment

Demographic Characteristics

Employment Potential & Allied Issues

Amenities & Infrastructure

Management Strategies & Social / Community Welfare Plan

Occupational /Community Health & Safety Management Plan

VI. Noise Environment

Ambient Noise Condition

Major Sources of Noise from the Project



Control Measures for high noise area

Environment, Health & Safety Management Strategies/Plan

VII. Occupational Health & Safety

Nature & Type of Operation works

Raw Material and its management (Handling, Storage & Transportation)

Operational Hazards & Control Measures (Precaution & Prevention Measures)

Management Strategies & Planning for Employee Safety, Welfare & Health

Occupational Health & Safety Plan

Disaster Management Plan

4.3 TYPES & NATURE OF IMPACTS CONSIDERED

The impacts can be classified in various categories depending upon various aspects. Typical types of impacts

considered for the present study are described below:

Direct (Primary) and Indirect (Secondary) Impacts:

Direct impacts occur through direct interaction of an activity with an environmental, social or economic

component. These effects are generally associated with the construction, operation, or maintenance of a facility

or activity and are obvious as well as quantifiable. Indirect impacts on the environment are those which are not

a direct result of the project involving a number of factors, often produced as a result of a complex impact

pathway. The indirect impacts are also known as secondary or even tertiary level impacts. These are generally

induced changes in the environment, population, economic growth and land use.

Short-term (Temporary) and Long-Term (Permanent) Impacts:

Impacts can be short-term or long-term depending upon the persistence or duration of the impacts. The

duration of impacts may have a lot to do with the project phase in which they occur: pre-operational (ex.:

construction), operational, or post-operational (ex.: after project completion or commissioning).

Positive (Beneficial) and Negative (Adverse) Impacts:

Even though the term "environmental impact" has come to be interpreted in the negative mean, many actions

have significant positive effects that should be clearly defined and discussed. This is particularly appropriate

for redevelopment or corrective actions whose specific purpose and need is to mitigate any undesirable

condition.



Cumulative Impacts:

Cumulative impacts are those environmental impacts that result from the incremental impact of the proposed

action on a common resource when added to other past, present, and reasonably foreseeable future actions. The

assessment of cumulative impacts is difficult in part due to the exploratory nature of the possible future actions

and in part due to the complex interactions that need to be evaluated when considering collective effects. Water

and air quality modelling provides a means to study effects of cumulative impacts.

4.4 CONSIDERATION OF PROJECT ACTIVITIES & COMPONENTS

It is very essential to study the project activities & components cautiously to identify the sources, potential,

extent & significance of the impacts as well as to suggest/provide mitigation measures for the abatement of the

identified impacts. Hence in the EIA study, data of the project activities & components along with the study of

unit‘s operation was done very precisely. The study revealed that there would be some impacts on the

environment due to the proposed expansion and its activities. The main activities of the project and associated

environmental impacts are described below and are documented for the purpose of the EIA Study.



Major Activities & Associated Potential Impacts

No. Activity of the Project Potential Impacts without Mitigation

A. Construction Phase

1. Site preparation and Construction

of additional utility area.

Local temporary impacts because of air

contamination due to dusting & emissions

during loading/unloading of construction

materials.

Impacts on noise and air environment due to

transportation of construction materials.

Noise generation due to construction activities.

Stress on water resource due to consumption of

water in construction activities.

Construction waste generation & land

contamination.

Occupational health hazards associated with

construction works.

2. Erection & Commissioning of

additional machineries/equipment

for the proposed expansion.




materials.


transportation of equipment and machineries.

Noise generation due to erection &

commissioning activities.


construction works.

2 Site development for additional

greenbelt & landscaping

Major impacts are beneficial but will lead to

negligible (almost Nil) adverse impacts during




the site preparation activity.

B. Operation Phase

1 Operation of Machineries &

Equipment

Impacts on ambient noise due to operation of

Noise generating equipments/machineries.

Air emissions affecting the ambient air quality.

Occupation Health issues associated with

operational hazards.

2 Handling & transportation of

materials

Noise generation due to transportation vehicles.

Dust emissions due to handling and

transportation of materials.


Operational Hazards.

3 Emissions from emission sources Impacts on air due to emissions from furnaces.

Stress on ecological structure due to change in

GLC of various pollutants in emissions.

4 Allied operations (maintenance &

services of machineries &

equipment etc.)

Local impacts on noise environment due to

noise generation

Contamination of water due to wash down of

contaminant from work site in storm water

drainage

Occupational health issues associated with

Operational Hazards (mechanical & electrical,

heat, noise, vibration etc.)

5 Water consumption, wastewater

generation & management

Stresses on water resource due to water

consumption.

Generation of industrial & domestic




wastewater.

Contamination of water or land caused by

disposal of untreated/poorly treated effluent.

6 Administrative, domestic & other

activities

Impacts on water & land environment due to

sewage generation & disposal

4.5 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES

4.5.1 LAND ENVIRONMENT

(A) CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Minor impacts will occur with the site preparation as only minor construction work for building shed,

equipment & machineries installation will be carried out for the proposed expansion. As the proposed project

is an expansion project for capacity enhancement, impacts due to the change in land use or land cover are not

envisaged as the proposed expansion will be carried out in existing premises. On the contrary, no requirement

of additional land and the utilization of existing land for the proposed project can be considered as a beneficial

impact in terms of resource maximization.

Also, as the land is levelled, major activities of site preparation like excavation for foundation, clearing of

vegetation, levelling and grading are not required. Some minor impacts on land environment are likely to

occur due to site preparation activities like construction and erection works for the expansion which are

expected to be of short duration and not much significant. Excavated earth (minor quantity) shall be stored in

stockpiles and covered with plastic/tarpaulin sheets or stored in closed room and reused for landscape

development along the corridor. The required plant & machinery for the full production capacity will be

installed within the said premises. Once, installed, no adverse impact is likely to be generated on the land

environment of the area.

Some minor impacts are envisaged due to spillage & leakage of fuel as well as contamination of land due to

construction material. However, the impacts are not significant as the land impacted by the temporary

construction material shall be cleared off immediately. Further, the proponent has planned to prevent any kind

contamination of spillage & leakage by providing well lined/paved area for the works having potential of

leakage/spillage of fuel or any other material. Hence, issue of contamination of land due to mixing of fuel or

construction material with soil would not arise.



During the construction phase, other impacts on land are likely to occur because of disposal of sewage &

garbage generated during the construction works from domestic activities of engineers, official & other

workers. Hence, considering the probable impacts, the proponent has planned to provide sanitation facilities of

the existing unit for the staff engaged in construction work. Thus, it shall prevent the impacts due to waste

dumping on land. The additional sewage shall be treated in existing Sewage Treatment Plant and treated water

shall be reused in process. Thus, impacts on land due to sewage or domestic waste are least envisaged.

Further, it is also noteworthy that the existing unit has developed a green belt cover within the existing

premises and it is also planned to carry out additional greenbelt development and management plan for the

proposed expansion, which shall lead to beneficial changes in land use & land cover. The greenbelt

development and its maintenance also results in many beneficial secondary & tertiary impacts like

improvement in ecological condition, prevention of air pollution, abatement of noise etc.

(b) OPERATION PHASE

The proposed project is an expansion of the existing unit. It is observed that the normal activities of the project

have no major impacts on the land environment. The details of the land requirement and planning for

development of the proposed expansion have already been described in Chapter -2 along with the layout

showing details of land utilization for industrial activities/structures/infrastructures as well as greenbelt. The

existing unit of Hindalco has well implemented Environment Management System which concentrates on

minimizing impacts on the environment due to the project activities.

During the operation phase, there will not be any considerable source of impacts on land. However, the land

contamination due to leakage/spillage of material or contaminated water may cause impacts on land/soil. The

proponent is aware of such potential sources of impacts on land, hence it is planned to implement most

efficient mitigation measures to minimize/eliminate the probable impacts. Currently the material handling,

storage and transportation is being done carefully & designated impervious storage area for raw material and

finished products etc. is provided. The same practice shall be continued after the proposed expansion, hence

the potential of soil contamination due to the materials is not visualized to be considerable.

The proponent has very good wastewater management facility with proper disposal facility. Negligible amount

of wastewater will be generated from proposed expansion, which will be treated in existing ETP

(Capacity:400 m3/hr) with spare capacity. Additional sewage will be treated in existing STP (Capacity:500

KLD) with spare capacity. Hence, the issue of contamination of land due to wastewater is not envisaged.

Moreover, no solid/hazardous waste shall be generated form proposed CCR plant. Hence impacts due to the

same on land environment is not envisaged.



Thus considering the above description of probable impacts and planned mitigation measures it is envisaged

that there will not be any major impacts on the land environment during the operation phase as well as the

construction phase.

4.5.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT

(a) CONSTRUCTION PHASE

During the construction phase, only minor construction work would be carried out for the proposed expansion.

As the land is already levelled, as it is within the existing premises of Birla Copper, major activities of site

preparation like levelling and grading are not required. Hence the dust generation is not expected from site

preparation activities. As a part of mitigation measures, it has also been proposed to arrange sprinkling of

water for suppression of dusting (if any) as well as temporary barricading structures shall also be provided to

reduce carryover of particulates away from the construction area.

During the transportation of construction materials like cement, the truck used for transportation would be

covered properly in order to minimize the material loss. Some of the loading/ unloading operations are likely

to cause fugitive dust emissions which shall be mitigated by proper loading/unloading procedures.

Air pollutants like PM, SOx, NOx, are likely to be emitted from the exhaust of transport vehicles and

equipment/machineries engaged in the construction activities. To further reduce the impacts due to

construction vehicles, mitigation measures such as provision for PUC certificate for vehicles, shutdown of idle

vehicle, regular checking and maintenance of the vehicles, etc. shall be undertaken during the construction

phase.

However, the impacts on the ambient air quality during construction phase shall be temporary in nature,

reversible and restricted to small area. Hence, it can be concluded that the impacts on air due to the

construction activities will be minimum or negligible and almost eliminated or minimized by implementing

proper mitigation measures.

(b) OPERATION PHASE

As it has been described earlier in Chapter-2, the operational activities during the expansion will negligible

sources of flue emissions. These emissions shall result in long-term impacts on the air quality.

The main source of air pollutant due to proposed expansion of CCR plant will be flue gas emissions from the

stack attached to furnace. The significant pollutants identified due to flue gas emissions are only particulate

matter.



Since LNG will be used as a fuel, there is no chance of flue gas emission. Adequate height of 26 meter will be

provided to the furnace stack for the proper dispersion of pollutant as per CPCB guidelines. There will not be

any chances of fugitive emission due to the proposed expansion in the CCR plant.

Baseline data indicates that Ambient Air Quality at the project site and in the surrounding study area is well

below the limits prescribed under the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS). To determine the

significance of impacts of proposed expansion with reference to the baseline air quality, detailed study has

been carried out for various emission from the proposed expansion. The impacts on the air quality have been

assessed for the proposed operation of existing furnaces and proposed furnace. The major air pollutants

anticipated are Particulate Matter, Oxides of Nitrogen and Sulphur dioxide from the induction furnace. The

emission rate of conventional air pollutants, during operation phase, have been calculated based on the

emission factors given in USEPA Factor Information Retrieval System and from the actual analysis data

provided by the client. The other relevant data for running of the model such as stack height, stack top &

internal diameter, stack gas velocity, flue gas temperature, etc. have been taken based on the information

provided by client.

No Stack

Attached

To

Stack ht. &

Dia.

Exit Gas Velo., M/Sec

Exit Gas Temp.

°C

Fuel Fuel

Consumpti

on

Stack

Height

APC

device

Probable

Parameters

Existing

1

S Shaft

furnace-1

26 m &

1.2 m

10-11 150 LNG 18000

SCM/Day

26 m Efficient

Burners

&

Adequate

stack

height

with SMF

PM: <150

mg/Nm3

Sox:< 100

ppm

NOx:<50

ppm

2 Shaft

furnace-2

20 m &

1.2 m

7-9 150 LNG 12000

SCM/Day

20 m Efficient

Burners

&

Adequate

stack

height

with SMF

As above

Proposed

1 Shaft

furnace-3

26 &

1.2

10-11 150 LNG 27000

SCM/Day

26 m Efficient

Burners &

Adequate

stack

height with

SMF

As above



Impacts on the Air Quality

The impact on air quality due to emissions from single source or group of sources is evaluated by using of

mathematical models. When air pollutants are emitted into the atmosphere, they are diffused into atmosphere,

transported and diluted due to winds. The air quality models are designed to simulate these processes

mathematically and to relate emissions of primary pollutants to the resulting downwind air quality. The inputs

include emissions, meteorology and surrounding topographic details to estimate the concentration of the

conservative air pollutants. The Industrial Source Complex – Short Term Version 3 (ISCST-3) model has been

developed to simulate the effect of emissions from point sources on air quality. The ISCST-3 model was

adopted from the USEPA guideline models and routinely used as a regulatory model to simulate plume

dispersion and transport. ISCST–3 (Steady-state Gaussian Plume Dispersion Model) is extensively used for

predicting the Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs) of conservative pollutants from point, area and volume

sources. The impacts of primary air pollutants are predicted using this air quality model keeping in view the

plain terrain at the project site. The maximum ground level concentrations of PM10, SO2 and NOx were

computed using hourly meteorological data during the study period.

The additional considerations made in the prediction are as under:

The flue gas volumetric rates & source strength was calculated based on the ultimate analysis of the fuel

and its loading rate. Excess air has also been added to the actual air requirement for combustion. Details

about the proposed stack are also presented.

The terrain of the study area was considered as FLAT with no flag poles.

Emission rates from the point sources were considered as constant during the entire period.

The mixing height for the region from CPCB‘s publication ―Atlas of Hourly Mixing Height &

Assimilative capacity of Atmosphere in India‖ has been considered in the model.

Meteorological data for the project area has been obtained for the period starting from March 2016 to

May 2016. Wind rose diagram for the same has been provided in Chapter-3.

Modeling Concept

Upon discharge to atmosphere, the emissions from stationary sources are subjected to the following physical

and chemical processes:

An initial vertical rise, called plume rise, due to initial buoyancy and momentum of discharge.

Transport by wind in its direction.

Diffusion by turbulence, and



Gravitational settling, chemical transformations, deposition, washout and other complex reactions.

Stack Emission Details:

Values of all parameters related to emission characteristics include:

o Exit gas temperature and velocity.

o Stack top diameter and height from ground level.

o Site specific and monitored details considered for input data

Emission rate after installation of pollution control devices shall also be measured.



Figure No 4.1: Isopleths for Concentration of SPM (E)



Figure No 4.2: Isopleths for Concentration of SOx (E)



Figure No 4.3: Isopleths for Concentration of NOx ( E)



Figure No 4.4: Isopleths for Concentration of SPM (P)



Figure No 4.5: Isopleths for Concentration of SOx (P)



Figure No 4.6: Isopleths for Concentration of NOx (P)



Result

It is noted from the computed results for the proposed scenario that maximum 24 hourly average GLC value

for the proposed scenario is 0.49749 g/m3

for SO2, 0.17849 g/m3

for NOx and 0.28482 g/m3

for Particulate

Matter.

Incremental Increase

For the purpose of the impact assessment, the more relevant determination for anticipated pollutants is the

incremental increase in the background concentration rather than the determination of maximum GLC values.

In the present study, an attempt has been made to determine the increase in the concentration of PM, SO2 and

NOx for villages where the ambient air quality stations were established through a substitution of relevant data

in the ISCST-3 model. The resultant concentration thus obtained along with the background levels is present

in Table 1.

Table 1: Resultant Concentration Value

Location Background Average

Conc. Incremental Conc. Resultant Conc.

Particulate Matter µg/m3

(Permissible Limit :100 µg/m3)

Project Site 90.9 0.000 90.9

Salt Pan area 94.1 0.01669 94.11669

Dahej 92.1 0.08890 92.18890

Lakhigam 94.9 0.13260 95.0326

Birla Copper jetty 96.1 0.28482 96.38482

Ambheta 91.6 0.01737 91.61737

Jogeshwar 94.4 0.00632 94.40632

Luvara 92.2 0.01055 92.21055

SOx µg/m3


Project Site 12.5 0.000 12.5



Location Background Average

Conc. Incremental Conc. Resultant Conc.

Salt Pan area 16.3 0.02915 16.32915

Dahej 18.3 0.15527 18.45527

Lakhigam 18.3 0.23161 18.53161


Ambheta 17.5 0.03034 17.53034

Jogeshwar 17.8 0.01104 17.81104

Luvara 18.1 0.01843 18.11843

NOX µg/m3


Project Site 20.7 0.0000 20.7

Salt Pan area 24.9 0.01046 24.91046

Dahej 25.4 0.05571 25.45571

Lakhigam 25.6 0.08310 26.68310


Ambheta 24.6 0.01088 24.61088

Jogeshwar 24.9 0.00396 24.90396

Luvara 24.9 0.00661 24.90661

Interpretation

When predicted 24 hourly ground level concentrations of SOx and NOx emissions from the proposed source is

added to background maximum monitored values, resultant values remain well below the prescribed National

Ambient Air Quality Standards at all the location. Incremental result of Particulate Matter (PM) was observed



higher at Birla Copper jetty but the average result of PM10 was within the limit. Higher Result of PM10 at Birla

Copper jetty may account due to adjacent Arabian sea & loading unloading activities in jetty area. Hence,

there is no significant impact is anticipated on the ambient air quality of the area due to the proposed source.

As part of precautionary measure, to minimize the likely environmental impacts on air environment due to the

proposed expansion project, necessary mitigation measures are also described in the following section.

Further, it is emphasized that all the emission have to be strictly controlled as mentioned in the mitigation

measure.

4.5.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT


During the construction phase, water will be required for civil works and for the domestic activities. The water

requirement during construction work will be a temporary requirement and the quantity will not be significant

as construction works will be moderate in size.

Water requirement has been cited mainly for preparation & mixing of concrete, cooling of construction

equipment, usage in spray and sprinklers for dust suppression etc. The water requirement will be 5 KLD & will

be sourced from existing water source. Minimum withdrawal is advisable for construction work and care shall

be taken to avoid wastage of water during the construction phase.

There would not be any kind of effluent generation during the construction phase; hence issue of effluent

disposal & hence impacts due to its disposal shall not arise. Proponent shall provide drinking water to all the

construction workers & truck drivers. However, some impacts may arise due to disposal of untreated sewage

but for prevention of such chances, proper sanitation facilities such as septic tank/soak pit shall be provided.

Due care shall be taken to see that the construction equipment are washed properly only at designated washing

area. Construction activity may also cause formation of stagnant pools of water, due care shall be taken to

avoid such conditions as it may lead to unhygienic conditions.

Hence, it can be concluded that all identified the impacts on water during the construction phase shall be

insignificant by following proper conservation and sanitation practices. As mentioned earlier, these impacts

will also be temporary in nature and limited to the construction phase only. In addition to this, proper and

effective Environmental Management Planning will be implemented to minimize the temporary effects.



(b) OPERATION PHASE

The impacts on water during the operation phase would occur since proposed expansion requires more water

for cooling purpose. Effluent generated shall have an adverse effect on the final discharge source if not treated

adequately. Existing source of water is GIDC Supply and same shall be used for additional water after

proposed expansion. (Water withdrawal permission is attached as Annexure-4). As mentioned in earlier

Chapter-2, the total consumption of the existing plant is 650 KLD including domestic consumption of 10 KLD

and the wastewater generation is 18.006 KLD including sewage of 8.5 KLD. To treat the existing effluent ETP

(Capacity: 320 m3/hr), with adequate units are provided. The treated effluent is utilized for the lime slurry

preparation, make up in slag granulation and in gas cleaning system within the premises. Hence, the existing

plant achieves zero liquid discharge. Existing domestic effluent is treated in MBR based STP (Capacity:500

KLD) and treated sewage is reused in process.

In addition to the existing water requirement, additional 408 KLD (8 KLD domestic and 400 KLD industrial)

water will be required for the proposed expansion. Additional 8.006 KLD industrial and 6.0 KLD domestic

wastewater will be generated due to proposed expansion. From the proposed expansion, there will be no

wastewater generation on daily basis from the manufacturing of CCR but the only negligible generation of

wastewater from the cleaning of coolant water tank of rolling mill intermittently. This will be about 2000

liters in six months (@0.006 KL/day). Other wastewater will be generated from cooling tower blow down i.e.

8 KLD for proposed expansion, this wastewater will not be generated only on a daily basis but after number

of multiple continuous recycle it will be treated in existing ETP. Additional wastewater generated from the

expansion activities shall be treated in the existing ETP and treated water shall be reused for slag granulation

or lime slurry preparation in ETP.

Details of water requirement, wastewater/sewage generation & management for the proposed expansion

project, water balance diagram of existing and after proposed expansion are illustrated in Chapter-2.

Further, accidental/ emergency disposal of poorly treated or untreated effluent may cause impacts on the

environment. Even such disposal may contaminate the groundwater if disposed off on land. Hence, regular

maintenance, monitoring & checking of Effluent Treatment Plant for its proper functioning shall be carried out

by the environment department. All necessary requisites or materials shall be provided for adequate

functioning of the Effluent Treatment Plant. Strict adherence to the disposal norms and prevention of disposal

on land or other water body shall be taken care of.

Ground water will not be extracted to meet the water requirement for the proposed expansion. Hence, there

will be no impacts on ground water due to water consumption. Moreover, care shall be taken that no

wastewater will be allowed to leach in the ground during the operational phase. Thus the quality of ground

water will have not any impact. Hence, no major impacts on ground water environment are envisaged in

presence of an effective Environment Management System.



Surface water quality in the study area was compared to IS:10500 (1991) for evaluation. Most of the

parameters are observed to be within the limits of the IS Standards. Since no effluent or sewage shall be

discharged in nearby surface water source, no impacts on surface water quality are envisaged.



Figure No 4.7: WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM

Looking to the overall scenario of water & wastewater management, since there shall be no use of the

groundwater resources, no impact on drainage pattern and there shall be maximum recycling of wastewater to

achieve zero discharge goal, no significant & considerable impacts on the water environment are envisaged.





During the construction phase, impacts on noise environment of the area will occur due to the noise generation

from construction equipment, machineries, mechanical works as well as some impact due to transportation.

Mainly the impacts of increased noise levels during construction are likely to occur due to increased movement

of trucks and other diesel powered material handling equipment. These impacts on noise will be minimal in

presence of noise abatement technologies and shall be confined within the project site itself. Thus the noise

impacts of transportation on the surrounding environment would be insignificant. However, movement of

trucks and machinery shall be strictly regulated during daytime to reduce the impacts of increased noise. The

noise generating sources during construction phase are as listed in below table with the approximate noise level

generated from each equipment.

No. Description Noise dB (A) @ 1 meter

distance

1 Excavators 90-95

2 Truck (20 ton) 84-88

3 Tractors 76-82

4 Scrapers, Graders 80-93

5 Cranes (movables) 75-86

6 Generators 74-86

The impacts of noise during the construction phase would be restricted to the construction site only and will

be minor & temporary in nature. The impacts on ambient noise levels shall be thus eradicated itself with the

completion of construction. However, the issue of impacts of noise on personnel engaged in construction

works shall be controlled by implementation of adequate mitigation measures. For this purpose, Personnel

Protective Equipment like ear muffs shall be provided. In furtherance, loud horn in the vehicles shall not be

allowed. Regular maintenance & lubrication of construction equipment/machineries shall be undertaken to

reduce the noise generation. Idle vehicles, construction equipment & other machineries shall be turned off to

avoid unwanted noise generation. Thus it is envisaged that the impacts on noise environment during the

construction phase would be insignificant after incorporating proper mitigation measures. Further it is also



understood that the impacts caused by the increase in noise level would not be considerable as project is in

GIDC area and there is no major human settlement/locality in the vicinity of the project site.

(b) OPERATION PHASE

During the operation phase, the noise anticipated from the proposed project shall be confined only within the

plant boundary and more precisely within the source area. The level shall be further minimized when the

noise reaches the plant boundary. The main noise generating sources in the plant are furnaces, material

handling systems, process machineries etc. All these sources will generate continuous noise. However, the

noise transmitted outside the plant area will below because most of the noise generating equipment will be in

closed structures. The noise generating sources during operation phase are as listed in below table with the

approximate noise level.

No. Description Noise dB(A) @ 1 meter

distance

1 Furnace 85 dB(A)

2 ID fan 80 dB(A)

3 Loading and Unloading area 75 dB(A)

For abatement of noise arising from equipment/machineries; acoustic enclosures, silencers or mufflers,

anti-vibrating pads shall be provided, wherever possible.

Ventilated control pulpits will be provided for working in noisy areas.

Vibration isolation will be provided for fans.

Regular monitoring of noise pressure level will be conducted inside and outside shops.

Checking leakage in high pressure steam pipelines and carrying out maintenance.

Providing silencers in exhaust line of steam vents.

Rotation of workers working in high noise area as per OSHA guideline.

The issue of impacts of noise levels on personnel employed in high noise generating areas shall be controlled

by providing Personnel Protective Equipment like ear muffs in order to mitigate the adverse health effects.

The adequate greenbelt developed in and around the plants shall greatly serve as an efficient barrier for

prevention of noise propagation outside the plant premises.



All the equipment/machineries operated in the proposed expansion shall be designed/operated in such a way

that the noise level in work place shall not exceed 80 dB (A) as per the requirement of Noise Pollution

(Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000.

4.5.5 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT


As described in various sections of the report, the site of proposed expansion is already under use of industrial

purpose for the existing unit of Birla copper and within the GIDC area. Also, there is no wildlife sanctuary,

park or forest area within 10 km radial periphery of the site Thus the site preparation will not involve the

clearance of any vegetation. Hence impact due to vegetation destruction is not envisaged. Further, as

mentioned in earlier sections, the construction work shall be moderate and not have much pollution potential.

Also the impacts of construction are most likely to be restricted within the site. However, it is suggested to

provide some standard mitigation measures like sprinkling of water on soil stock piles & unlined land area,

prevention of runoff from the site and storage of construction materials like cement in enclosed storage area.

Hence, issue of impacts on ecology during the construction phase are least envisaged.

Such mitigation measures shall ensure that there is no carry-over of air borne particulate matter on the nearby

area. Also it is planned to transport the construction materials like cement & soil in closed trucks to prevent

the air borne particulates during the transportation activities. It is also recommended to avoid night traffic &

loud noise in trucks to prevent any kind of considerable impacts on nearby area.

(b) OPERATION PHASE

As mentioned above, there is no wildlife sanctuary, park or forest area within 10 km radial periphery of the

site. Only some scattered flora around the project site and only some common fauna are reported dwelling in

the area. Further, the project site is provided with good boundary-plantation and all necessary mitigation

measures for control of air pollution and noise beyond the site premises. Also as described in the section of

air environment, the emission from the proposed expansion would not be significant to cause any damage to

the habitual area as all necessary & efficient modern air pollution control technologies are already planned to

prevent impacts on air environment and on the ecology of the nearby area. Further, with respect to the local

terrestrial ecological component, it has been noticed that the impacts due to the proposed expansion would

not be considerable as there would not be any major source of pollution to have impact on ecology of the

area. Even the most considerable source of pollution-emission, is not likely to cause any harm to the local

agricultural & terrestrial ecological components as the incremental GLC values for the surrounding area are



found almost negligible for all the pollutants. Besides this, the issue of deposition of particulates emitted

from the project is also found to be insignificant to cause any damage to the nearby area as the proponent has

planned efficient control measures by creating a green belt to serve as a barrier for preventing the escape of

particulates outside the plant boundary.

The chances of impacts on aquatic ecology of the river Narmada and Arabian sea may arise only if any

pollutant is discharged into it. But as mentioned earlier, all the wastewater is/will be reused/recycled within

the premises.

Thus considering the present situation of the ecology in the area, it is envisaged that there will not be any

adverse impacts on ecology.

4.5.6 SOCIO ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT


As the proposed project is to be established in the existing unit hence, issue of economic losses due to land

acquisition for the proposed project is not anticipated. Further, the temporary employment generated during

construction and commissioning of proposed project will have slight beneficial impacts on the economic

environment. Since, local labour will be sought for construction and installation of the machinery; it will result

in benefit to the economic condition of the area. Approximately 50-70 nos. of local workers shall be hired

during the construction phase.

The project area is well connected with road networks and hence issue of traffic and transport infrastructure is

not envisaged. The nearest locality is situated such that nuisance due to noise generation is envisaged.

However, the minor impacts of vehicular noise are envisaged which will be mitigated by avoiding night

transport activities. Even some high noise generating construction activities will also be conducted during

daytime only.

Thus, it is envisaged that the construction phase of proposed expansion would not pose any adverse impacts on

the socioeconomic layout.

(b) OPERATION PHASE

Similar to the construction phase, the operation phase shall provide significant opportunities for employment

in skilled, semiskilled & unskilled categories. This would multiply economic opportunities, and henceforth



enhance the livelihood patterns of this region. The proposed project would require appx.43 personnel for

operation works and maximum of the human resource requirement shall be met by local employment. Thus

the proposed project would considerably be beneficial to the socioeconomic conditions of local area. Welfare

activities along with employment done by project proponent shall improve the socio-economic condition as

well status of health & education in the region.

Thus looking to the overall scenario of activities & probable impacts of the proposed expansion, it has been

envisaged that there shall be an overall improvement in socio-economic layout of project area which shall be

the key benefit of the proposed project. The adverse impacts on socio-economic environment shall be almost

none during the operation phase of project.

4.5.7 IMPACTS ON SAFETY & HEALTH


During the Construction phase, some effects on occupational health and safety of the employees working in

the site are envisaged. Major health issues encountered will be physical & accidental hazards.

Sr. No. Environmental

Attribute

Impacts Mitigation Measures

1

Safety & Health

Major health issues encountered

will be physical & accidental

hazards during the construction

work, installation works & vehicular

movement.

Workers shall be well equipped with

necessary PPEs like helmets, goggles,

safety mask, ear plugs, safety shoes,

etc.

Incident / accident reporting system

shall be developed and all the workers

shall be made aware about the same

Periodic inspection & testing of

construction equipment & machineries

shall be done

Sanitation facilities, portable water,

restroom etc. shall be provided to the

labour force during construction phase.



Drinking water and sanitation facilities of existing unit shall be provided to all construction workers and truck

drivers during the Construction phase. All plans and construction schedule will be followed as per the relevant

laws approved by competent authority, so as to minimize the occupational health hazards. With effective

implementation of the mitigation measures, proper care and training for the safety aspects to be followed

during working hours, the occupational health and safety impacts can be controlled.

(b) OPERATION PHASE:

Following measures shall be undertaken for Health & Safety of the employees during the operation phase.

Sr.

No.

Environmental

Attribute

Impacts on Environment Mitigation Measures

1

Safety & Health

Major health issues encountered shall

be physical hazards & accidental

hazard during the operation phase

Emergency preparedness plan shall be

implemented.

First aid/other emergency treatment shall

be provided.

Workers/employees shall be well

equipped with personnel protective

equipment

Only authorized persons shall be

allowed inside the plant.

A health monitoring program shall be in

place to monitor the health of the

persons working on the site to ensure the

health status of all concerned.

Fire hydrant system, fire extinguishers

shall be installed at different locations

within premises.

Suitable notices / boards shall be

displayed at designated locations

indicating appropriate hazard warnings.



Good house-keeping shall be ensured

within the factory premises.

Yellow lines for man movement &

material movement passage area to be

segregated and marked with distractive

visual display



4.5.8 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PLAN:

Due to the proposed expansion additional trucks will be required for raw material, finished product & other

consumables transportation.

Truck movement plan for products for existing and proposed expansion

- Existing CCR Plant

Copper cathode: 30 trucks/ day

Copper Rod: 25 trucks/ day

- After CCR3 production

Copper cathode: 05 trucks/ day

Copper Rod: 50 trucks/ day

As we are converting part of copper cathode to copper rod in the proposed expansion, over all the change in

the truck movement will be NIL. Hence, a total of 55 trucks was/will be expected for transportation of the

products and no additional trucks shall be involved.

As, discussed earlier, the existing unit has a good network of internal peripheral roads in the plots for the

safety and access requirements to various buildings and yards. Moreover, the project site is located in a well-

developed area with necessary infrastructure facilities. The access roads to the plant premises are well

developed and maintained throughout the year.

However, as a part of EIA study the EMP for traffic management is presented in the following table:

Traffic Management Plan

Objective To ensure that there is smooth traffic within and outside the facility for the duration

of the construction phase and operation phase

Concern Trucks, tankers and other vehicles may cause traffic jam outside and within the

premises.

Impacting

activity

Mitigation

measures

Measures for management

Location & Responsibility Monitoring



Timing

Vehicular

movement

Controlled

vehicular

movement

(preferably with

clearly

demarcated

entry/exit) with

adequate

supervision

Within and

immediately outside

the site -

Construction &

operation phase

Contractor/

Project Manager

during

construction

phase.

Security and

concerned

departments

during operation

phase.

Security-in charge

and security team

Demarcation of

separate

vehicular lanes

and pedestrian

routes

Within the site -

Construction &

operation phase

Contractor/

Project Manager

during

construction

phase. Security

and concerned

departments

during operation

phase.

Security team

Vehicle entry

and exit

scheduling so

that traffic

congestion is

not created on

the external

road leading to

the site

Within and

immediately outside

the side -

Construction &

operation phase

Contractor/

Project Manager

during

construction

phase.

Security and

concerned head

of department

during operation

phase.

Security-in charge

and security team



4.6 ENERGY CONSERVATION

DURING CONSTRUCTION & OPERATION PHASE

Electricity shall be used during construction phase to provide power to construction equipment and in

operation phase for lighting of buildings and running utilities equipment. Electricity consumption shall be

kept at a minimum when possible by adopting electricity conservation measures.

The project proponent shall ensure that the contractor selected to construct the project shall implement best

management practices to conserve renewable resources.

For conservation of energy, following measures are already adopted in the existing plant and same shall be

continued after the proposed expansion.

Birla Copper trains and educates employees in areas of energy conservation.

Birla Copper carries out regular internal and external audits to identify areas for improvement and

benchmark performance continuously against the best.

Energy efficient machineries is used during the operation phase.

Energy audits are conducted on a regular basis.

External lights are controlled through timers for auto on/off function based on timings.

The power factor for improvement in capacitors is provided individually for AC loads.

Use of VFDs for various utilities in variable load application to optimize pump and air handling unit

performance.

Automated day light control, and use of LED for lighting.

Use of solar energy for lighting street area

Awareness among employee towards switching off the AC/lights/other electrical equipment when not

in use.

4.7 MATRIX ANALYSIS FOR IMPACT ASSESSMENT

Matrix methods are basically generalized checklists where one dimension of the matrix is a list of

environmental, social & economic factors likely to be affected by the proposal. The other dimension is a list

of actions associated with the development. These relate to both construction and operation phases. Here each

cell represents likely impacts resulting from the interaction of a facet of the development with an

environmental feature. With some matrices, qualitative representation of the impact importance and

magnitude are inserted in individual cells.



Matrices provide cause-effect relationships between the various project activities and their impacts on

numerous environmentally important sectors or components. They are a graphic tool for display of impacts to

the audience in a manner that can be easily comprehended.

The impacts of different project activities on various environmental components like ecology, environmental

pollution, aesthetics and socio-economics have been summarized in the form of a matrix and are presented in

Table 4.1 & 4.2 for construction phase and in Table 4.3 & 4.4 for the operation phase.

To depict the potential impacts associated with each activity, a two-dimensional matrix system has been

employed with defining impact magnitudes of each cause. All the impacts are confined to the study region of

10-km radius from the plant boundary. The summary shows the influence of the Environment Management

Plan (EMP) i.e. impacts predicted for both, with and without EMP. The MATRIX System assumes the

following:

The environmental indices identified can be classified into the following:

Physical Parameters : Surface water quality

Ground water quality

Air quality & Climate

Soil Quality

Land use pattern & Topography

Ecological Parameters : Forests/ Parks/ Sanctuary

Flora & Fauna

Aquatic ecosystem

Social Parameters : Aesthetics

Local Housing structure : Health & Safety

Economic Parameters : Agriculture

Industries

Employment

The assessment of the impacts of general impacting activities on the above parameters of environmental

indices can be done by establishing a co-relation by ―Cause and effect relationship‖ with the help of impact



matrices.

The matrices for both the construction and operation phase are presented, where the environmental impacts

are prepared for two conditions:

i. Without mitigation/control measures.

ii. With proposed mitigation measures for adverse / beneficial effects.

The various criteria for evaluation of qualitative matrix are explained herewith:

1. No Impact (0) :

This indicates that the project activity is unlikely to have any impact on an environmental attribute.

2. Negligible Adverse Impact (-1) / Negligible Beneficial Impact (+1) :

It signifies that the actions have minor effect, adverse or beneficial, on the environmental parameters

concerned.

3. Significant Adverse Impact(-2) / Significant Beneficial Impact (+2) :

The activities and their environmental impacts are judged to be significant if they create, or have the potential

to create concern in the public or professional community.

4. High Adverse Impact(-3) / High Beneficial Impact (+3):

The action that can create or have a potential to create controversy in the public or professional community

due to its long-term effect. They may be at times irreversible.



Table No. 4.1: Construction Phase: Matrix Evaluation without mitigation measures

PROJECT

ACTIVITIES

PARAMETE

RS

Exca

vati

on

Wate

r R

equ

irem

ent

Con

stru

ctio

n

Mec

han

ical

Work

s

Sit

e C

leara

nce

& P

lan

tati

on

Mach

ine

Op

erati

on

Lan

dsc

ap

ing

Back

Fil

lin

g

Su

rface

Pavin

g

Dom

esti

c &

Mis

c. A

ctiv

itie

s

Tra

nsp

ort

ati

on

act

ivit

ies

Dem

an

ds

of

faci

liti

es

TO

TA

L

PHYSICO-CHEMICAL PARAMETERS:

Surface Water

Quality 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 -1 0 0 -3

Ground Water

Quality 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Air Quality &

Climate -1 0 -1 -1 0 -1 0 -1 0 0 -2 0 -7

Soil Quality -1 0 -1 -1 -1 0 0 -1 0 -1 0 0 -6

Landuse pattern -1 0 -1 0 -1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0 -3

ECOLOGICAL PARAMETERS:

Forest/ Park/

Sanctuary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Flora & Fauna 0 0 -1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

Aquatic

Ecosystem 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SOCIAL PARAMETERS:

Aesthetics -1 0 -1 -1 0 0 1 0 0 -1 -1 0 -4

Local housing

structure 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Health & Safety -1 0 -1 -1 0 -1 0 0 0 0 -1 0 -5

ECONOMIC PARAMETERS:

Agriculture 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Industries 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 -1

Employment 1 0 2 2 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 11

TOTAL -4 -1 -4 -2 0 -1 4 -4 1 -3 -4 1 -17



Table No 4.2: Construction Phase: Matrix Evaluation with mitigation measures

PROJECT ACTIVITIES

PARAMETERS

Exca

vati

on

Wate

r R

equ

irem

ent

Con

stru

ctio

n

Mec

han

ical

Work

s

Sit

e C

leara

nce

&

Pla

nta

tion

Mach

ine

Op

erati

on

Lan

dsc

ap

ing

Back

Fil

lin

g

Su

rface

Pavin

g

Dom

esti

c &

Mis

c.

Act

ivit

ies

Tra

nsp

ort

ati

on

act

ivit

ies

Dem

an

ds

of

faci

liti

es

TO

TA

L


Surface Water Quality 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 -2

Ground Water Quality 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Air Quality & Climate -1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 -1 0 0

Soil Quality -1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

Landuse pattern -1 0 -1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 -1


Forest/ Park/ Sanctuary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Flora & Fauna 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Aquatic Ecosystem 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SOCIAL PARAMETERS:

Aesthetics -1 0 -1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Local housing structure 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Health & Safety 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1


Agriculture 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Industries 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -1 -2

Employment 1 0 2 2 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 11

TOTAL -3 -1 -1 2 4 1 5 0 1 -1 -1 0 6



Table No 4.3: Operation Phase: Matrix Evaluation without mitigation measures

PROJECT ACTIVITIES

PARAMETERS P

lan

t O

per

ati

on

s

Wate

r R

equ

irem

ent

Tre

atm

ent

& D

isch

arg

e

Em

issi

on

s fr

om

pro

cess

sta

cks

Fu

git

ive

emis

sion

s

Nois

e gen

erati

on

Haz.

Wast

e gen

era

tion

Mate

rial

Sto

rag

e &

Ha

nd

lin

g

Sp

ills

& L

eak

s B

reak

dow

n o

f C

on

trol

Eq

uip

men

t

Tra

nsp

ort

ati

on

act

ivit

ies

Dem

an

ds

of

faci

liti

es

TO

TA

L


Surface Water Quality 0 -2 -1 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -2 0 0 -6

Ground Water Quality 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -1 0 0 -2

Air Quality & Climate -1 0 0 -2 -1 0 0 -1 0 -3 -2 0 -10

Soil Quality 0 0 -1 0 0 0 -1 0 -1 -1 0 0 -4

Landuse pattern 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0



Flora & Fauna 0 1 0 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 -1 -1 0 -4

Aquatic Ecosystem 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -1 0 0 -3

SOCIAL PARAMETERS:


Services 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3

Health & Safety -1 0 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 -1 -1 -3 -1 0 -11


Agriculture 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Industries 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0 -1 -2 -1 0 -3

Employment 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 2 2 9

TOTAL 3 -1 -1 -5 -3 -2 -1 -1 -6 -14 -3 3 -31



Table No 4.4: Operation Phase: Matrix Evaluation with mitigation measures

PROJECT ACTIVITIES

PARAMETERS P

lan

t O

per

ati

on

s

Wate

r R

equ

irem

ent

Tre

atm

ent

& D

isch

arg

e

Em

issi

on

s fr

om

pro

cess

sta

cks

Fu

git

ive

emis

sion

s

Nois

e gen

erati

on

Haz.

Wast

e gen

era

tion

Mate

rial

Sto

rag

e &

Ha

nd

lin

g

Sp

ills

& L

eak

s

Bre

ak

dow

n o

f C

on

trol

Eq

up

.

Tra

nsp

ort

ati

on

act

ivit

ies

Dem

an

ds

of

faci

liti

es

TO

TA

L


Surface Water Quality 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 -2

Ground Water Quality 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 -1

Air Quality & Climate 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -1 0 -3

Soil Quality 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 -1

Landuse pattern 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0



Flora & Fauna 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0

Aquatic Ecosystem 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 -1

SOCIAL PARAMETERS:


Services 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3

Health & Safety 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 -1


Agriculture 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Industries 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 1

Employment 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 3 13

TOTAL 5 0 3 -1 0 0 0 1 0 -7 0 3 8



The matrix analysis reveals that the proposed project would be posing only some adverse impacts on the

environment. Apart from them, there are significant positive impacts on the environment due to the proposed

project. From the overall study and evaluation of impacts, it can be concluded that the overall negative

impacts from various activities on different environmental parameters are negligible with proper EMP in

place. Even some of the negative impacts can be converted into positive beneficial impacts with proper and

timely implementation of EMP. Hence, the project can be considered environmentally safe & fit.



CHAPTER-5

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN

Environmental Monitoring is an essential tool for sustainable development & ensuring effective

implementation of Environmental Management Plan & Mitigation Measures adopted. It also updates the

Environmental Management System for effective conservation of environment in-line with the ongoing

project activities/operation. A periodic Environment Monitoring Plan enables environmental management

system with early forecasts for additional action required and modification of ongoing actions for

environment management, improvement & conservation. It provides the exact idea for mitigation measures

to be implemented as it is linked with actual distraction of environmental quality due to the project

activities. Hence, monitoring of critical parameters of environmental quality is very essential in the routine

activity schedule of the project operation. Thus, a well implemented Environmental Monitoring Plan

enables the proponent to identify the deviation of environmental quality due to the proposed expansion

project activities.

5.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN

The Environmental Monitoring Plan efficiently identifies gaps in the Environmental Management System,

predicts early signs of need of additional action in order to modify ongoing actions for environment

management, improvement & conservation. It provides a regular assessment of mitigation measures

implemented for abatement of the possible environmental impacts likely to occur due to the activities of the

proposed project, as it is linked with actual deviation of the environmental quality. Hence, monitoring of

critical parameters of environmental quality is an essential activity to be included in the routine schedule of

project operation. An Environmental Monitoring Program shall be scheduled for the following major

objectives:

To verify the results of the impact assessment study.

To assess the changes in environmental conditions, if any, during the project operation/activities.

To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical.

To monitor the effectiveness of Environment Management Plan & implementation of the mitigation

measures planned.



To identify any significant adverse transformation in environmental condition in order to plan

additional mitigation measures.

To ensure that new parameters other than those identified in the impact assessment study, do not

become critical on account of commissioning of the project.

5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS TO BE MONITORED

Since the project is an expansion project, the unit has a well-established environment and safety department

which undertakes measures for environmental protection and mitigation of environmental impacts. Several

measures have been proposed in the environmental mitigation measures for minimizing the adverse impacts

of the proposed expansion. These shall be implemented as per the proposal and monitored regularly to

ensure compliance with environmental regulations and also to maintain healthy environmental conditions

within & around the unit.

A major part of the sampling and measurement activity shall be concerned with long term monitoring aimed

at providing an early warning of any undesirable changes or trends in the natural environment that could be

associated with the plant activity. This is essential to determine whether the changes are in response to a

cycle of climatic conditions or are due to impacts of the plant activities. In particular, a monitoring strategy

shall ensure that all environmental resources which may be subject to contamination are kept under review

and hence monitoring of the individual elements of the environment shall be done. During the operation

phase, Environmental Management Cell (EMC) shall undertake all the monitoring work to ensure the

effectiveness of environmental mitigation measures. The suggestions given in the Environmental

Monitoring Programme shall be implemented by the EMC by following an implementation schedule.

In case of any alarming variation in the ground level concentration of ambient air, stack emissions, work

zone air and noise levels, performance of effluent treatment facilities etc. and the same shall be discussed in

the EMD. The variance from norms shall be reported for immediate rectification action at higher

management level. In addition to the monitoring program, the following shall also be done to further ensure

the effectiveness of mitigation measures:

Internal environmental audits shall be carried out to check the compliance with standards / applicable

norms by in-house experts.

Promotion of Energy Optimization Technology including periodic energy audits.

The environmental aspects to be monitored for proper implementation and effectiveness of various

mitigation measures envisaged / adopted during the design and commissioning stage of the proposed

expansion plan are described hereunder:



5.2.1 Ambient Air Quality

Monitoring of ambient air quality within the plant premises is already being carried out. The fuel proposed

to be used in the proposed furnace will be LNG. Hence, no major emissions will be generated due to the

proposed expansion project. However, monitoring is/shall be carried out for Respirable Suspended

Particulate Matter (RSPM) & Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) and Oxides of

Nitrogen (NOx) for the compliance of prescribed limits of CPCB/GPCB.

Online Ambient Air Monitoring Station

5.3.2 Plant Stack Emissions Monitoring

The unit already carries out periodical monitoring for existing stacks attached to the furnaces. Same practice

shall be carried out after the proposed expansion. PM, SO2 & NOx in stacks is carried out to assess the

performance of pollution control facilities installed for the unit. In case emissions are found to exceed the

norms, the ‗on duty‘ personnel checks the relevant parameters and take appropriate corrective actions.

For the proposed expansion, along with the performance test of main plant, equipment performance test &

calibration of pollution control equipment shall be made on a regular basis. A detailed maintenance schedule

shall be drawn for all pollution control systems. The maintenance shall be done strictly as per the schedule.



5.3.3 Effluent Quality

Source of water is GIDC water Supply. Industrial water requirement of existing CCR plant is 630 KLD and

for the proposed CCR plant will be 400 KL/Day. Domestic water requirement of existing plant is 5 KLD

and for proposed plant additional 4 KLD water will be required for proposed expansion.

Generated 3.5 KLD additional sewage will also be treated in existing Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) of 500

KLD capacity. Treated sewage is/will be reused in process.

There will be no wastewater generation on daily basis from the manufacturing of CCR but the only

negligible generation of wastewater from the cleaning of coolant water tank of rolling mill intermittently.

This will be about 1000 liters in a six month (@0.006 KL/day), which will be treated in existing ETP. Other

wastewater will be generated from cooling tower blow down i.e. 8 KLD for proposed expansion, which will

be reuse in slag granulation in smelter and lime slurry preparation in ETP.

5.3.4 Noise Quality

Noise monitoring is already carried out in existing premises by third party. Noise levels shall be measured at

the source of generation. However, in case of high noise generating equipment which are not frequented by

the plant personnel, the area shall be clearly marked as ‗High Noise‖ area and the employees shall be

provided with personnel protective equipment like ear plugs/ear muffs before entering such areas.

After the proposed expansion, the noise level monitoring shall be carried out once in a month at selected

locations. Data obtained after noise monitoring shall be carefully evaluated to identify changes, if any.

Gross deviation from the baseline will require a thorough review of operations at the proposed expansion

project to identify the reasons of high noise generation.

5.3.5 Solid / Hazardous Waste Generation & Utilization

No Solid/Hazardous waste is/shall be generated from existing/proposed expansion project.

5.3.6 Green Belt Development

Unit has already maintained 106 hectors well-developed greenbelt area within the factory premises and

township. Additional 1500 m2 of greenbelt area shall be developed by the proponent. The following plan has

been made & implemented for existing greenbelt and same shall be followed after proposed expansion.

Annual plans for tree plantation with specific number of trees to be planted shall be made. The

fulfilment of the plan shall be monitored by the EMC every six months.

A plan for post plantation care will be reviewed in the monthly meetings. Any abnormal death rate of

planted trees shall be investigated and acted upon immediately.



Watering of the plants, manuring, weeding, hoeing will be carried out for corresponding years.

5.3.7 House Keeping

The EMC cell is/will keep a very close monitoring of the housekeeping activities and organizing regular

meetings of joint forum at the shop level (monthly), zonal level – (once in two months) and apex level

(quarterly).

5.3.8 Occupational Health and Safety

Unit has already prepared key safety measures implemented in the existing plant and same shall be

implemented for the proposed expansion. Routine medical examination of the personnel is being carried out.

A systematic program for medical check-up at regular intervals is already carried out and same shall be

followed for newly employed workers to ascertain any changes in health conditions due to the working

conditions.

5.3 MONITORING METHODOLOGIES

Monitoring of environmental attributes shall be collected as per the guidelines provided by

MoEFCC/CPCB/GPCB. The methods followed shall be recommended/standard method

approved/recommended by MoEFCC/CPCB.

Table No 5.2: Method Adopted for Environmental Sampling/analysis

Attributes

METHOD

Sampling / Preservation Analysis

A. Air Environment

1. Micro Meteorological

Data

2. Ambient Air Quality

Mechanical/automatic

1. Mechanical or automatic

weather station/ Meteorological

Department

2. Samplers (Designed as per

USEPA) to collect PM2.5,

PM10 and the gaseous samples

-----

Standard methods such as

IS: 5182 & CPCB guideline,

ASTM etc.

B. Noise Instrument : Noise level meter As per CPCB guidelines



5.3.9 Socio-Economic Development

Expansion in the existing plant will improve the infrastructure & economic conditions of the locality thereby,

uplifting the social development of the same. It is suggested that the plant management should have structured

interactions with the community to disseminate the measures taken by the industry and also to elicit

suggestions for overall improvement for the development of the area.

5.4 MONITORING PARAMETERS & FREQUENCY

The monitoring parameters and frequency of monitoring shall be as following:

Table 5.1: Post Project Environmental Monitoring Programme

No. Item Parameters Frequency

1 Ambient Air quality PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, Monthly

2 Stationary Emissions

from flue gas stacks

PM, SO2, NOx Monthly

3 Noise Equivalent noise level - dB (A)

(min. 10 locations)

Monthly

4 Greenbelt Number of plantation (Units), Number of

Survived Plants/Trees, Number of Poor

Plant/Trees

Yearly

5 Environmental Audit As per Directions of Hon. High Court,

Gujarat

Yearly

6 Renewal of Consents

and Authorization

Renewing consent to operate under

applicable acts

90 days before

expiry of validity

7 Compliance of EC

conditions

Submission of 6 monthly compliance

reports.

Half yearly

8 Water cess Filing annual returns for cess incurred on

water consumption.

Yearly by 30th

Sept

9 Medical surveillance The health status of all the workers in Yearly for all



No. Item Parameters Frequency

program respect of occupational health hazards. employees and

half yearly who

are working in

hazards areas.

5.5 PROGRESS MONITORING AND REPORTING ARRANGEMENTS

The rational for a reporting system is based on accountability, to ensure that the measures proposed as a part of

the Environmental Monitoring Plan get implemented in the proposed expansion project. The monitoring and

evaluation of the proposed management measures are critical activities in implementation of the proposed

expansion. Monitoring involves periodic checking to ascertain whether activities are going according to the

plans. It provides the necessary feedback for the project management to keep the program on schedule.

Table 5.3: Reporting System for Environmental Monitoring Plan

Sr. No. Details Indicators Stage Responsibility

A. Pre-Construction Stage: Environmental Management Indicators and Monitoring

Plan

1 Suitable location for

dumping of construction

wastes has to be

identified.

Dumping locations Pre-

construction

Construction

Contractor

B. Construction Stage: Environmental Condition Indicators and Monitoring Plan

1 Dust suppression at

construction site

Construction site Construction Project Dept.



Sr. No. Details Indicators Stage Responsibility

2 The parameters to be

monitored as per

frequency, duration &

locations of monitoring

specified in the

Environmental

Monitoring Programme

Air quality Construction Project Dept.

through

approved

monitoring

agency

C. Operation Stage: Management & Operational Performance Indicators

1 Solid waste generation,

utilization and dumping

As per guidelines of

statutory bodies

Operation Concerned Plant

Units / EMD

2 Hazardous waste

dumping, storage and

disposal as specified by

statutory authorities.

As per the notifications

/ guidelines specified

by statutory

authorities.

Operation -Do-

3 Stack Emissions from

Process & de-dusting

stacks

All parameters as

specified for stacks of

different units by

Statutory Authorities

Operation Concerned Plant

Units / EMD

4 Meteorology, Ambient air

quality and Noise levels.

All parameters as

specified by Statutory

Authorities

Operation -Do-

5.6 LABORATORY FACILITIES

Hindalco Industries Limited (Unit: Birla Copper) has already set up permanent and efficient laboratory

with adequate manpower and facilities for the effective implementation of environmental control

measures. Ambient air, stack, effluent and noise analysis is carried out by it‘s laboratory on daily

basis. PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOX, Cl2, HCl etc samples are taken from ambient air and analyzed in their

laboratory on daily basis. Analysis of PM, SO2,SO3, Acid mist, Ammonia and fluoride for stack

sample is carried out as per their pre scheduled basis for various stacks emission points. COD, Acidity



and heavy metal analysis is also carried out on daily basis for smooth operation of ETP. BOD, TSS

and residual chlorine is also measured on daily basis for STP. The current practice will be continued

after proposed expansion.

Birla Copper also submit the monthly statics (based on daily results) of ambient air quality and stack

and effluent analysis report to state pollution control Board.

5.7 DOCUMENTATION & RECORDS

The environmental department in respect of operation of pollution control facility is/will maintain the

following records:

Instruction manual for operation and maintenance

Log sheet for self-monitoring of pollution control equipment and technology

Manual for monitoring of ambient conditions

Instruction manual for monitoring of water and gaseous parameters discharged from the factory and

also for various parameters of pollution control facilities.

Stationary records as per the Environmental Acts.

Monthly and annual progress reports.

5.8 BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR EMS

On regular basis, environment management cell shall inspect the necessity & availability of the materials,

technologies, services & maintenance works. The cell shall make appropriate budget for this purpose.

Regular record review for change in financial requirement of environment management shall be done and

appropriate budgetary provisions shall be made. With other budget, budget for Environmental Management

System shall also be prepared and revised regularly as per the requirement.



COST BREAK-UP FOR ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION MEASURES

No. Particular

Existing Cost

(INR lacs)

2015-16 *

Proposed Cost

(INR lacs)

Total Cost

(INR lacs)

1

Total EMS Cost

(Including Air Pollution Control Measures,

Environmental Monitoring, Environmental

Audit, Greenbelt development)

7788 20 7808

TOTAL 7788 20 7808



CHAPTER-7

PROJECT BENEFITS

7.1 GENERAL

Hindalco Industries Limited (Unit: Birla Copper) proposes to expand their capacity by increase in the

capacity of Continuous Cast Copper Rod from 2,40,000 TPA to 4,84,000 TPA by setting up of a new

Continuous Cast Copper Rod plant of 2,44,000 TPA capacity in the existing Copper Smelter Complex.

Hindalco Industries Limited envisages to use a state of art technology, adopting modernized

machineries/equipment and novel process technologies, with waste minimization techniques at a capital

investment of Rs. 240 crores.

7.2 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL

The proponent has planned to recruit around 50 numbers of skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled manpower

according to the requirement cited in the project planning. The direct & indirect employment potential of the

project would be significantly beneficial for the area. The planned employment will have significant

benefits after the commissioning of the proposed project.

The following measures shall be taken to provide basic facilities to the workers.

All the workers will be hired from local population.

All the basic facilities such as tap water, sanitation, drinking water, lunch space will be provided.

First aid box, free medicines, etc. will be available within the project site.

Adequate PPEs will be provided to all workmen during construction as well as operational phase.

7.2.1 SKILLED AND SEMI-SKILLED

Skilled and Semi-skilled employment potential in terms of direct and indirect employment of the area will

be non-marginal which will usually remain widespread across a long region. As the proposed project takes

place, indirect employment is likely to grow further during the construction as well as operation phase of the

project. The project is expected to generate substantial indirect employment in other sectors such as

hospitality sector, food & catering, transportation services, other service units, etc. Overall assessment of the

employment and income effects indicates that the project has strong positive direct as well as indirect

impacts on employment and income generation of the area.



7.2.2 UN-SKILLED

The proposed project has employment generation potential by way of recruiting local unskilled people also

directly for different activities of the project, specifically at the construction phase and some of the

temporary works during the operation phase as well. It is expected that substantial portion of the investment

in this project will trickle down to the local people in the form of employment and income generation.

7.3 CSR ACTIVITIES

7.3.1 PAST CSR ACTIVITIES

The proponent has been actively engaged in social welfare activities from the past many years. Summary of

the social welfare activities carried out by the proponent from April 2015 to March 2016 is given below and

the cost of which was Rs. 260 lakhs.

Sr. No Name of the Program Total beneficiaries

1 Education

A. Transportation to girls students of Lakhigam,

Luvara for higher study

B. Support to P J Chheda High School by paying

salary of two teachers of science stream (11th

& 12th

standard – Guj. Med)

C. Educational Materials distribution among 81

Govt. Primary Schools / Secondary school of

entire Vagara tehsil, covering 69 villages + 2

villages of Bharuch tehsil (Note Books, Math

Practice, School Bag, Slates, etc)

D. Sports Competition organized jointly (CRC

Level)

E. Cheque for school renovation handover to

Hon‘ble Chief Minister of Gujarat Smt.

Anandiben Patel by P&COO

F. Taluka level Science & Maths exhibition

G. Students workshop Dhyey Sadhna Shivir

H. New Anganwadi Centre for Migrated Children at

17,091 nos.



Labor colony

I. Education Exposure tour Atali

J. Printer for primary School Atali

2 Sustainable Livelihood

A. SHG meeting, papad & masala making

B. SHG Conceptual Training AV SHOW

C. Farmers camp organised

D. Agriculture training / seed money distributed

E. Tailoring class for Rural women

F. Beauty Parlour Class

G. Tree Plantation among 13 Schools

H. Sponsored 01 rural youth pursuing ITI

I. Garments Exhibition by Tailoring Class

students

J. Certificate Distribution to beneficiaries of

Tailoring & Beauty parlour classses

1943 nos.

3 Community Health

A. Supply of Drinking Water to Lakhigam village

B. Eye Camp

C. Sanitation Seminar with DRDA

D. General Medical Camp

E. Health Check-up Camp - Primary School

F. Malnutrition Awareness Camp Healthy Baby

G. Toilet Construction at Goladra / Kadodra &

Aladar villages

H. Dental Check-up Camp for Govt. Primary school

students

84,866 nos.



I. Immunisation (MMR Vaccine) to Anganwadi

going children

J. Health talk for Adolescent Girls

K. Awareness Programmes on seasonal Health

Issues and Hygiene Sanitation

L. Specialised/ Issue based Camps/ Blood Donation

Camp, Gynaec Camp, Pediatric

M. Financial Support to Chronic Ailment Patient

needs treatment (Handicapped lady)

N. Pulse Polio administered cases

O. Toilets Constructed – Own Funding/ Partial

Contribution

P. Drinking Water supply through pipeline

Q. STD/ AIDS Awareness/ Tuberculosis 1 Patient

4 Infrastructure Development

A. ―Khat Muhrat‖ of Primary School at Dandia

Bazar- 06 at Bharuch

B. Community hall/ Garden and Pavor block

development/ Drainage at Lakhigam

C. Rural Houses (poor people including Indira

Awas) (66Houses*5 Members)

5269 nos.

5 Social Issue / Other

A. Environment Awareness Programme at Shri P J

Chheda High School – Dahej

B. De- Addiction Seminar

C. ―Maha Swachhata Abhiyan‖ at Bharuch by

employees of Birla Copper ―ADITYA BIRLA

CLEANATHON‖

18,332 nos.



D. District Administration of Bharuch, Dr. Vikrant

Pandey, IAS, District Collector, Bharuch

recognised M/s. Hindalco Ind. Ltd, Unit: Birla

Copper by issuing appreciation certificate in

recognition of support for dedication and

participation to worthy cause of cleanliness drive

―Aditya Birla Opal Cleanathon 2015‖ organised

on May 24,2015 at Bharuch town. The event is

registered in Limca book of records.

E. Mass marriage at Bhutnath Mahadev Temple

F. Gym inauguration at Dahej village

G. 50 nos. tarpaulin provided to earthquake affected

people of Nepal

H. Bus provided for AMBAJI PAD YATRI

I. CSR Audit on Sustainability by KPMG

J. Food packets given to flood affected people of

Banaskantha district

K. Celebration of International Yoga Day, Republic

Day, Women‘s Day at Bharuch

L. Values promotion camps/ Awareness drives on

knowledge attitude & practice (Aditya Birla

Cleanathon , Fire & Safety, Environment,

ABHYAM)

M. Organising local festivals and cultural prog.,

(Orphan children get together) Mahashivratri at

Bhutnath Mahadev Temple

N. Tree Plantation with Tree Guard Impact

Assessment Survey

O. Rural sports events

P. Blanket distribution



Free Eye Camp

Blood Donation Camp

Books Distribution



7.3.2 FUTURE CSR PLANS

The company also proposes to carry out CSR activities for the welfare of local community. Under this, the

company will propose a detailed CSR Plan. Under this plan, the proponent has allocated a budget of Rs.

6.22 crores within the five year. Activities under the following areas have been identified and shall be

carried out:

Education

Vocational and technical training

Buildings and Civil structures ( Construction of Primary & Secondary schools at Dahej )

Infrastructure Development

Curative Health Care program



CHAPTER-8

ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) constitutes an important part of the EIA report. The main

purpose of EMP is to minimize the identified potential environmental impacts to be generated from the

proposed expansion project and to mitigate the consequences. HIL, on basis of the impacts identified, sets

targets to reduce the negative impacts, plans and decides action plan to achieve the target effectively and

efficiently. EMP ensures an effective implementation methodology and alternatives for mitigation measures

planned/recommended to reduce or eliminate the adverse impacts to maximum possible extent during the

operation of the proposed expansion project.

8.1 COMPONENTS OF AN EMS

In order to develop an EMS, an organization has to identify the impacts, set targets to reduce the negative

impacts, plan and decide the targets as well as set proper and appropriate steps to achieve the targets effectively

and efficiently.

A. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT IDENTIFICATION:

Any expansion work, either small or large, has some environmental implications. The environmental

implications may be beneficial or adverse, but the main objective of impact identification is to specify areas

that are likely to be affected by the expansion project. It refers to identification and documentation of the actual

and potential environmental impacts of an organization's operational activities to be undertaken.

This work has been done as a part of the EIA study which is already explained in earlier chapters. Further the

impact identification shall be recorded and reported with the expansion activities of the proposed project.

B. OBJECTIVES AND TARGETS:

To comply with all the conditions of Approved ToRs/ regulations/ applicable laws stipulated by MoEFCC or

Central/ State Pollution Control Boards.

To exercise all necessary controls with respect to management of liquid/gaseous pollutants.

To remediate wastewater and air emissions posing adverse impacts on the environment by installing

adequate pollution control technology and equipment.



To install adequate APC along with stack monitoring facility at all gaseous emission points to ensure

emissions within prescribed limits.

To plan environmental conservation and protection activities for the purpose of achieving environmental

standards and to improve methods of environmental management practices.

To improve working environment for employees by implementing mitigation/control measures for

Occupational Health & Safety and thereby improving workplace environment.

To make budgetary provision and allocate funds for environmental management system and to ensure

timely revision of the same.

To implement and ensure effective implementation of Planned Mitigation including R&D programme

for innovative technologies for better environment, resource conservation/recovery/recycling/reuse

especially to promote waste utilization and wastewater recycling/reuse.

To encourage and inspire employees and contractor for highest performance and attentive response for

environmental conservation, protection and improvement.

Growth and development of the company.

8.2 SUMMARY OF ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

A detailed study for the identification & prediction of anticipated environmental impacts of the proposed

expansion was carried out and the outcomes of the study are described in earlier Chapter-4. The major

impacts which require mitigation measures to protect the environmental health are further considered for

formulation of this ―Environmental Management Plan (EMP)‖. The summarized list of the major impacts

considered for EMP is illustrated below.

Impacts on Land Environment:

Minor changes in land cover due to minor construction activity at the project site.

Contamination of land due to disposal of untreated sewage during the construction & operation phase.

Contamination of land due to disposal of untreated effluent during the operation phase.

Impacts on Air Environment

Air pollution due to site preparation works as well as air borne construction materials during

construction phase.

Air pollution from transportation vehicles during the Construction phase & Operation Phase

Air pollution due to plant operations & related activities during the operation phase



The major sources of air emission from the proposed project are:

Point source emissions (Furnaces)

Dust emissions (Minor construction activity and transportation activity)

Impacts on Water Environment

Impacts on water resources due to abstraction to meet the water requirement of the proposed expansion.

Water pollution due to runoff from construction site containing soil particles & construction materials.

Impacts on water resources due to abstraction to meet the water requirement of proposed expansion.

Impacts on Noise Environment

Impacts due to noise generation by transportation activities during Construction & Operation phase

Noise generation from Construction works

Noise generation during Operation phase

Impacts on Ecological Environment

Clearance of minor useless vegetation for area expansion

Direct & Indirect Impacts on vegetation & flora and fauna due to process emissions, flue gas emissions

and noise impacts.

8.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

8.3.1 LAND ENVIRONMENT & SOLID/HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT

a. Construction Phase

The major problem will be disposal of excavated earth generated during construction phase which shall

be well handled by landfills to level the low lying areas.

Reuse of construction waste for PCC works, development of roads and misc. filling for construction

works.

Vegetation clearance shall not be a major issue as the proposed expansion will be carried out in the

existing premises using spare open land.



Use of excavated soil for landscaping & gardening/greenbelt development.

Storage & handling of construction materials shall be done properly to avoid spillage or leakage.

Further, the proponent has planned additional Green Belt within the premises, which shall prove to be

beneficial from all aspects and shall effectively compensate the minor impacts.

Care shall be taken that domestic waste of construction workers is not disposed of on land.

Existing sanitation facilities shall be provided for construction workers.

b. Operation Phase

During the operation phase of proposed expansion no additional Solid/Hazardous waste will be generated. No

hazardous/solid waste is generated from existing CCR plant also. Hence impacts on land environment due to

disposal of solid/hazardous waste shall be ruled out.

Impact on land environment due to disposal of untreated sewage will not be raised as sewage will be

treated in existing sewage Treatment Plant (STP).

Additional Effluent will be treated in existing effluent treatment plant and treated effluent will be reuse

for slag granulation, lime slurry preparation and gardening purpose.

Hence, after implementation of proper EMP there will be no adverse impacts on land environment.

8.3.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT


Potential sources of air pollution during construction of additional facility at the plant premises area are (i)

dust emissions due to vehicle movement and (ii) exhaust emissions from diesel generator, heavy construction

equipment, and vehicles. The impact on air quality during construction phase will be minimized by adopting

following mitigation measures.

Dust suppression by regularly spraying water on roads and work sites shall be practiced.

Wetting or covering stockpiles, the proper location of material stockpiles and covering loaded trucks

during the transportation of material shall be ensured.

Loading/Unloading of construction materials shall be done in a proper way to avoid dust generation.

Use of low-emission vehicles and wherever feasible, construction equipment powered by electricity

shall be preferred.



Maintenance of engines and use of vehicles with PUC Certificates. Contractors will be required to

strictly implement these measures.

DG set equipped with stack of adequate height.

Engines of idle vehicle machineries/equipment not in use, shall be turned off.

Regular inspection for proper implementation of mitigation measures shall be done.

b. Operation Phase

In the proposed expansion project, the sources of air pollution will be:

Point source emission (furnace)

Fugitive emission (from transportation activity)

a) Action Plan to Control point source emissions from all the sources

Company will adopt the following mitigation measures to reduce the impact on air environment:

Source of point source emission will be stack attached to furnace. To control the emission from the

furnace 26 meter height stack shall be provide, no other air pollution control equipment will be required

as fuel will be LNG.

Adequate stack height of 26 meter is already provided with existing furnaces.

Regular monitoring of stacks and vents is/shall be carried out to check the emissions and it‘s records

shall be maintained.

Regular ambient air quality monitoring is/shall be carried out within premises and in the nearby area for

PM, SOx and NOx.

Ensuring the operations of various process units are as per specified operating guidelines/ operating

manuals.

Strict adherence to maintenance schedule including lubrication for various machinery/ equipment.

An additional greenbelt around the factory will be developed for reducing the air pollution and

attenuation of noise.

Good house-keeping shall be maintained in the premises to avoid dust emissions.



b) Action Plan to control ambient air quality as per NAAQS Standards:

The design stage endeavors to mitigate the problems related to environment and health at the process

technology/source level itself. Besides standards, emphasis would be given to comply with all design

standards/ regulatory norms as specified by CPCB/MoEFCC/GPCB etc.

No secondary fugitive emission will be generated from the proposed expansion

The gas emission from the furnaces is/will be vented through adequate height and dia. of chimney.

It is proposed to develop additional Green Belt within the premises, which will intercept the dispersing

particulates. Also the sprinkling of water is recommended in areas where dust emission is expected

within the plant.

Ambient air monitoring shall be carried out by an independent agency every month to assess particulate

matter, SOx & NOx in at different locations within the plant.

The internal roads of the plant are constructed from RCC to minimize dusting due to transportation.

8.3.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT


Water requirement during the construction phase will be fulfilled by existing source. No extraction of

water shall be done from the borewell or nearby surface resources for construction activity.

Further the proponent shall ensure to implement good operation practices to minimize the use of water

so as to reduce the consumption of water to maximum possible extent.

Proper drinking water facility will be made available to the construction workers.

Due care shall be taken to avoid formation of stagnant pools, which may cause damage to the aesthetic

condition as well as other environmental & socioeconomic factors.

Proper sanitary facility of the existing unit will be provided for construction worker during the

construction phase and waste will be treated in existing Sewage Treatment Plant (STP).

b. Operation Phase

Industrial water requirement of existing CCR plant is 640 KLD and for the proposed CCR plant

additional 400 KLD water will be required.

Domestic water requirement of existing plant is 10 KLD and for proposed plant additional 8 KLD water

will be required.



Source of water for expansion will be existing source i.e. GIDC water supply.

Only 8.006 KLD of additional wastewater will be generated from industrial cooling and coolant wash

water, which needs treatment and shall be treated in the existing ETP and treated water shall be reused

for slag granulation or lime slurry preparation in ETP.

Generated additional sewage will also be treated in existing Sewage Treatment Plant (MBR

Technology) of 500 KLD capacity. Treated sewage is/will reuse in process.

Quality of wastewater

Table No: 8.3.1 Wastewater Quality

Sl. Parameters Unit

Before

Treatment After Treatment

Min Max

1 pH 5.5 9.0 5.5 – 9.0

2 Turbidity NTU 21 43 < 20

3 Oil & Grease mg/l 28 35 < 20

4 Total Suspended Solids mg/l 150 300 < 100

5 Chemical Oxygen Demand mg/l 50 250 < 250

6 Bio Chemical Oxygen Demand 3 day

at 27o C

mg/l 20 100 < 100

Details of Existing ETP:

Industrial effluent streams from various plants like Smelter, Refinery, Sulphuric Acid plant, Phosphoric acid

plant, DAP plant, CCR Plant, PMR plant is sent to main ETP by pumping, which is collected in Raw Effluent

Tank - I & II. ETP is having capacity to treat effluent up to 320 m3 /hr of avg. load (max – 400 m

3/ hr).

Additional effluent generated (i.e 8.006 KLD) due to proposed expansion will also be treated in existing ETP.



Effluent Treatment process:

Effluent from raw effluent tank is pumped at regulated flow rate to Precipitation Reactor Tank, PRT - IV

where lime solution is added. The lime dosing is linked with pH of effluent which is raised to 1.5 to 2.0 with

agitation and air purging. The effluent from PRT– IV is sent to Thickener – II, where flocculent are added to

and precipitated solids mainly Calcium Sulphate is settled in bottom in form of slurry. This slurry is dewatered

in Rotary Vacuum Drum Filter – II and thus obtained ETP waste is known as first stage ETP gypsum. The first

stage ETP gypsum is non-metallic solid waste.

The overflow effluent from Thickener – II is pumped to PRT- I, where lime solution & FeSO4 solution are

added to increase the pH further from 1.5 to 2.0 up to 4.0 to 5.0. Agitation and air purging is continued, from

there it flows by gravity to PRT-II, where pH of effluent is gradually raised up to 8 with addition of lime. In

PRT-III pH is raised up to 9 to 10 by lime slurry addition. During this process all heavy metals get precipitated

and from their hydroxides with Lime along with Calcium Sulphate. Neutralized effluent then overflows to

thickener – I, flocculent solution is added in before entry in to Thickener - I. Precipitated solids get separated

from bottom as slurry and sent to Rotary Vacuum Drum Filter through slurry tank. Thus formed ETP waste

mainly contains calcium sulfate and traces of heavy metals, which is dry enough for easy handling, and sent

through dumper to secured land fill facility for ETP waste disposal. Clear overflow from Thickener – I is sent

to Treated Effluent tank. Blow down of cooling towers is collected in a sump and sent to lagoon

In Treated effluent Sulphuric acid is dosed in effluent to attain pH range of 6.5 to 8.5. Thus treated effluent is

sent to Treated Effluent Lagoon through Alumina Filter. The lagoon is having two compartments and two

vertical pumps are installed on Treated Effluent Lagoon for final disposal in deep sea at a point (Lat. 210 42‘

00‖, Long. 720 30‘35‖). The effluent discharge point is recommended by NIO and approved by GPCB. A

HDPE pipeline (3.2 km long) is installed for disposal of treated effluent from ETP.

As per the study conducted by National Institute of Oceanography in 1996, release of treated effluent quantity

up to 5300 m3/day at above mentioned point after meeting with the GPCB norms is unlikely to have any

adverse impact on marine ecology. At present the effluent discharge quantity is lower than 5300 m3/day.

Treated effluent from lagoon is also partially used for green belt development within premises.



A. Effluent Units

Sr. No. Name of Unit / Tank Capacity Size

1. Raw Effluent Tank I & II 400 m3 (each) Dia - 8.25 M ; Height - 7.5 M

2. Precipitation Tank I, II,

III IV& V

133m3

(each) Dia - 5.2 M ; Height – 6.5 M

3. Thickener (Clarifier) I &

II

236 m3 (each) Dia – 10 M ;SWD – 3 M, Depth – 3.5 M

4. Treated Effluent Tank 55 m3 Dia - 4 M ; Height - 4.4 M

5. Treated Effluent Lagoon 6000 m3 -

6. Pressure Sand Filters 4 m3 Dia - 2.38 M ; ST Height – 1.5 M

7. Alumina Filters 1.4 m3 Dia - 1.5 M ; ST Height - 0.8 M

B. Mechanical Equipment

Sr. No. Name of Unit Capacity KW / RPM

1. Raw Effluent Tank Pump I & II 80 m3/hr 7.5 / 1500

2. Sulphuric Acid Pump 0 – 50 LPH 0.75 / 1500

3. Circulation Pump 70 m3/hr 5.5 / 1500

4. Treated Effluent Transfer Pump I & II 130 m3/hr 12 / 1500

5. Floor Pump 25 m3/hr 3 /1500

6. ETP waste Slurry Pump I & II 30 m3/hr 20 / 1500 & 55 / 1500

7. Lime Dosing Pump I & II 12 m3/hr 2 / 1500



8. Flocculent Dosing Pump 0 – 1000 LPH 0.75 / 1500

9. FeSO4 Sump Pump 30 m3/hr 3 / 1500

10. FeSO4 Dosing Pump 0 – 2000 LPH 5 / 1500

12. Air Compressor 1000 m3/hr 5 / 1500

12. Rotary Vacuum Drum Filter I & II 42 TPD (each) 1 .5 / 1-2

13. Lime Silo I & II 150 m3& 45 m

3 --

14. Agitator in Precipitation Tank - I, II &III -- 10 / 1500

15. Agitator in Thickener -- 3 / 1500

16. Screw Conveyor -- 3 /1500

17. Electric Hoist -- 7.51 /1500

18. Agitator for FeSO4 Sump -- 3 /1500

19. Agitator for Flocculent -- 0.75 /1500

20. Agitator for Transfer Effluent Sump -- 7.5 / 1500

21. Treated Effluent pump 28 lt/sec

22. Transfer Pump (Lagoon) 108 m3/hr 37 / 1470



C. Solution Preparation Tanks

Sr. No. Description of Tanks Capacity Size

1. H2SO4 tank 0.3 m3 Dia – 0.5 m

2. Lime Solution Tank I & II 33 m3 (each) Dia - 3 m

3. FeSO4 Sump 30 m3 Depth – 3.5 m

4. FeSO4 Day Tank 15 m3 Dia - 2.6 m ; Height - 3 m

5. Poly-electrotype Tank 1.1 m3 Dia - 1.2 m ; Height - 1 m

ETP FLOW DIAGRAM



Details on Process of Sewage Treatment Plant

The sewage water from various plants comes through the separate piping network in to Sewage Treatment

Plant. This plant is having avg. 500 KLD of treatment capacity. Additional sewage generated due to proposed

expansion i.e 6 KLD will also be treated in same STP. The raw sewage is collected in the equalization tank.

Before entering to the equalization tank, the sewage is passed through a coarse screen (16 mm), a fine screen

(6 mm) and finally to oil & grease trap. Air is supplied to the equalization tank with the help of a mixing

blowers to prevent settling of the sewage. From the tank, sewage is passed to the anoxic tank for further

treatment through the sewage transfer pumps. The oxygen deficient environment within the anoxic tank

supports the micro-organisms required for the de-nitrification process. Then the sewage is passed to the

aeration tank. Air required by the micro-organisms is provided by the blowers and is introduced into tank

through an air diffuser array. The sewage along with bio-mass is passed to the Membrane Bioreactor Tank

(MBR) where the biological sludge separated by ultra-filtration membranes to produce particle free

permeate/treated water. The settled biological sludge is recycled to aeration tank through Return Activated

Sludge (RAS) pump for maintaining bacterial level & excess sludge is passed to Sludge Sump tank to Filter

Press. The filter press removes water from the sludge, filtrate is passed to equalization tank and dewatered

sludge is sent for disposal. As a final process stage, permeate is transferred to a UV unit for disinfections then

finally stored in treated water tank for further plant water usage. The water quality achieved is as good as it is

directly recycled back to plant processes. The advantages of this system are:

Effective organics (COD and BOD) removal

Low sludge production

Good tolerance against effluent water quality fluctuation

Optimized process circumstances in different treatment step minimize energy consumption and

nutrient dosing.

Highest solids tolerance of any hollow-fiber membrane

Second stage to obtain higher recoveries

Sl.

No.

Units Size Qty Make

1 Settling Chamber 3.55m x 1.70m x 1.25m SWD + 0.5m FB 1 RCC

2 Bar Screen Chamber 3.00m x 0.70m x 0.30m SWD + 0.5m FB 2 RCC

3 Oil & Grease Trap

8.00m x 1.70m x 0.75m SWD + 0.85m

FB 1 RCC

4 Collection Sump 21.40m x 5.80m x 2.10m SWD + 0.75m 1 RCC



FB

5 Anoxic Tank 5.00m x 2.00m x 4.50m SWD + 0.5m FB 1 RCC

6 Aeration Tank 7.00m x 3.50m x 4.50m SWD + 0.5m FB 1 RCC

7

Membrane Bio-

Reaction Tank

3.20m x 3.05m x 3.615m SWD + 0.5m

FB 1 RCC

8 Sludge Holding Tank 2.70m x 3.05m x 2.60m SWD + 0.5m FB 1 RCC

9 Treated Water Tank

11.90m x 3.70m x 5.75m SWD + 0.5m

FB 1 RCC

Water Conservation Measures

General Measures for minimizing water impacts are as follows:

Regular monitoring of water, wastewater shall be done as per the monitoring schedule planned as a part

of Environmental Monitoring Plan.

Rain water harvesting is already carried out in the existing premises as part of water conservation

measures and same is used for greenbelt development purpose.



Efficient arrangement & designing of reuse system of treated wastewater for lime slurry preparation,

slag granulation, gas cleaning system and green belt development.

Maintaining records of water consumption, water characteristics & wastewater generation.

Maintenance of good housekeeping to avoid contamination of storm water.

8.3.4 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

a. Construction phase

As discussed earlier, the proposed expansion will be carried out within the existing premises of Birla Copper

which is considerably away from human settlement and in GIDC area. Hence, the proposed project would not

have any direct impacts on the ecological environment during the construction phase. The site is also situated

away from ecologically potential area. Therefore, no major mitigation measures are required for the

construction phase. Besides, it is also planned to develop additional greenbelt area in & around the

construction site during the construction phase, which will slightly improve the ecological status of the project

site.

The following measures shall be implemented during the construction phase:

Proper arrangement for materials storage & handling to prevent emissions from construction site/

operation area.

Water sprinkling in the area under construction.

The construction workers shall be instructed to minimize the clearing area to the possible extent.

Stacks of adequate height & internal diameter are to be provided for existing & proposed utilities.

Construction works shall be carried out during day time only to avoid impacts due to noise generation.

All necessary structural mitigation measures suggested/planned for control of air, water & noise

pollution.

b. Operation phase

During the operation of the proposed expansion project, no major harm will be caused to the ecology as there

will be no major source of pollution after implementation of mitigation measures for pollution control using

necessary technology/method/system. Further, the additional greenbelt development in the project area shall

improve the existing ecological condition of the area. No special mitigation measures are required for ecology

conservation during the operation phase, as neither any effluent shall be discharged outside factory premises

nor any hazardous/solid waste shall be generated from the proposed expansion. However, as it is noticed that



the additional greenbelt development will improve the ecological condition of the area, following care shall

also be taken as mitigation measures:

Proper wastewater & sewage treatment facility of existing unit is utilized during the proposed

expansion.

Adequate Air pollution Control measures shall be provided to reduce the impact on ecology.

Management shall ensure that all possible efforts are being made to maintain healthy greenbelt within &

around the plant area.

The management shall provide all necessary materials/requisites for development, maintenance &

protection of the greenbelt.

Regular irrigation, fertilization & pest control program shall be a part of routine activity during the

operation phase.

The upbringing of Green Belt will prove to be an ideal dwelling place for many avifauna and terrestrial

fauna, hence care shall be taken to avoid any harm to the faunal community being settled in the

greenbelt.

Regular records of greenbelt development activities with necessary statistics shall be maintained.



The proponent shall ensure that no hazard is caused due to noise generation during the course of

construction works. For this purpose the proponent shall ensure that the workers are provided with

individual personnel protective equipment like ear muffs or ear plugs in areas with high exposure to

noise.

Further, it shall also be ensured to carry out periodic and regular maintenance of the equipment,

machines and spare parts which shall include lubrication, replacement of defective parts etc. in order to

bring down the decibel of noise to maximum possible extent.

Noise generation due to movement/operation of vehicles & equipment/ machineries shall be well

managed by restricting the movement/operation during night hours.

Regular lubrication & preventive maintenance shall be done to reduce noise generation.



b. Operation phase

The fact that the project site is situated away from human settlement and within the notified industrial estate,

significant noise impact on human settlement is not envisaged. Also, the volume of transport vehicles will not

increase due to proposed expansion. The company has already developed a green belt around the periphery of

the premises, which shall act as a barrier to the propagation of noise from the factory premises. This shall

further reduce the noise levels appreciably.

It is recommended to measure and maintain records of noise level at various places within and outside the

factory premises. Following measures are/shall be adopted for abatement of noise during the operation phase:

Noise generating equipment like pump, motors, compressors, engines, power generator sets/engines etc.

shall be mounted on sturdy concrete foundations with proper & suitable rubber padding to reduce

vibrations & thereby noise generation.

The major noise producing equipment will be provided with sound proof container, where ever possible.

Pumps, fans, compressor, etc. will be statically and dynamically balanced.

Additional greenbelt shall be developed and maintained around high noise generating area as well as

plant premises to help in attenuation of noise.

Regular lubrication & preventive maintenance shall be done to reduce vibration & noise generation.

Use of PPEs like ear plugs and ear muffs will be made compulsory near the high noise generating

machines.

Regular audiometric test of workers should be done and the medical reports of same should be

maintained.

Display should be made clearly indicating noise prone area along with dB level.

Moreover, the personnel shall be provided breaks in their working hours, with the continuous exposure

not increasing three hours.

All vehicles shall maintain speed limit inside the premises to avoid unusual acceleration of engine &

loud horns shall be prohibited.

Periodic monitoring of noise levels as per post-project monitoring plan shall be done on regular basis.



8.3.6 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH, SAFETY & HOUSE KEEPING


Occupational health & safety will be the prime focus during the construction stage. Occupational health &

safety of the construction workers shall be ensured with the following measures:

The management shall ensure that all workers/employees are provided with basic Personnel Protective

Equipment (PPE) like ear plug/muff, safety helmet, face mask, safety gloves, safety goggles, safety

shoes etc.

The management shall also ensure that the quality of these PPEs is properly checked before providing to

the workers. It shall also be ensured that all the safety equipment are placed properly and are available

instantaneously when required.

Management shall also ensure to have safety and first aid facility for the workers/ employees engaged in

the working of the plant in order to provide them with necessary treatments in case of accidental

mishaps or their health breakdown.

Necessary training shall be imparted to the required workers/ employees in various aspects, viz.

handling of the materials, precautionary measures to be taken while working, how to use the safety

equipment, etc. so as to make all workers literate, thus minimizing the chances of any accidental

mishaps.

Proper care shall be taken to provide the migrant laborers with clean hygienic residence accompanied by

basic amenities like drinking water, sanitation, etc.

Arrangements for medical facilities shall also be made in case of any disturbance in health during the

course of work.

b. Operation phase

The proponent is very much concerned in terms of health, safety and environment protection. The proponent

is committed towards safety and shall prepare ‗Health, Safety & Environment Policy‘ (Attached as

Annexure-7). The company has engaged a qualified safety manager and a doctor for regularly checking

health of the employees. Additionally, medical aid is/shall be arranged with the help of local hospital. Annual

health check of the employees shall also be carried out and records shall be maintained (Same is attached as

Annexure-8) Regular training to plant personnel in safety, firefighting and first aid is already provided in

existing unit and same shall be made available after proposed expansion.



Until now, no major accident has taken place in the existing unit. Thus from the previous performance of the

company, same dedication is to be continued for the proposed expansion. To maintain high standards in

Health, Safety and Environment; various activities are undertaken at the site. Similar practice will be followed

after the proposed expansion.

1. Safety Training is provided to the employees.

2. Safety Sirens with Alarm System in case of emergency are provided.

3. Emergency Control Room is established.

4. Assembly point are defined for safe gathering of the employees during the times of emergency.

5. Fire Hydrant System is installed.

6. Fire Extinguishers are provided.

7. Mock drills are periodically conducted and factors like response time are evaluated.

8. Fire squad team is formed for handling any emergency situation & regular training of squad team is

conducted.

9. First Aid Facility and training are provided.

10. Personal protective gears and equipment are provided to employees.

11. Health checkups are organized at regular intervals.

12. Health check-ups shall be organized at regular intervals.

Unit carries out Pre Medical Examination (PME) of employee every year. PME done every 6 monthly of

Employees who are working in hazardous area like smelter and mechanical. As a part of new initiative, all

data related to PME us recorded as ORACLE based soft copy.

Periodical Medical Examination includes -

1- Complete Physical Check up - Blood Pressure, Pulse, colour vision test

2 - Laboratory Investigations- CBC , HB, Lipid Profile, Blood sugar , Urine, S.creatinine, BUN , SGPT.

ESR ,ETC.

3 - E.C.G.

4 - Spirometry

5 - Vision Test

6 - Audiometry

7 - Conselling

8 - Complete Personal & Family history



Housekeeping

Proper housekeeping is an essential part of sound environmental management. Good housekeeping practice

is/shall be carried out during the operational activities of the proposed expansion project. It shall be rigorously

seen that there is no accumulation of wastes, especially combustible wastes inside the plant area.

In summer, dry grasses & vegetation growing inside the plant area will be cut and removed. All firefighting

equipment and warning devices will be kept in perfect working conditions at all the times. It will be seen that

all personnel are aware of the implications of environmental pollution and simple practices to avoid pollution

and untidy workplaces.

8.4 CLEANER PRODUCTION PRACTICES

Cleaner Production (CP) is defined as the continuous application of an integrated preventive environmental

strategy applied to processes, products and services to increase overall efficiency and reduce risks to the

environment including human beings. Unlike the pollution control which is an after event ‗react and treat‘, CP

is a forward looking approach, ‗anticipate and prevent‘.

The energy conservation action for the existing unit as well as the proposed expansion activity aims at

reducing wastage of power as well as fuel. The proponent has already planned & implemented many

comprehensively designed actions for energy conservation as their daily routine for the existing production &

allied operations. Similar action for energy conservation is planned for the proposed expansion. The major

actions planned for energy conservation are listed below:



8.4.1 CONSERVATION OF WATER

The conservation program for the proposed expansion activity shall aim at reducing wastage of water and

power. Following measures for water and energy conservation is already taken in existing plant and same shall

be continued after proposed expansion.

Water Conservation and Rainwater Harvesting:

Reuse of treated effluent for inlet water for R.O.Plant and permeate used for process.

Reuse of treated effluent for lime slurry preparation, slag granulation and gas cleaning system &

gardening purpose.

Reuse of treated sewage (from MBR technology) in process.

Low volume water sprinklers system is already installed for gardening and water sprinkling purposes.

Use of more native plants for greenbelt development that require little water to thrive in the locality.

Watering the landscapes in the morning to prevent water loss due to evaporation.

Adding mulch surrounding the trees to prevent water loss through evaporation.

Conduct regular surveys and awareness programs for water conservation at an employee level.

Regular inspection, checking and maintenance of valves, taps, flow meters and other equipments.

Provision of low flush toilets in the administrative building.

Rain water harvesting (RWH) plan for conservation of water.

STP sludge is/will be uses as manure in own premises.

8.4.2 CONSERVATION OF ENERGY

The company trains/will train and educates/will educate employees in areas of energy conservation.

The company carries/will carry out regular internal and external audits to identify areas for

improvement. Energy audit shall be used as a tool for monitoring purpose.

Energy efficient machineries, fixtures and equipment is/will be used during the construction and

operation phase as far as possible.

Enough care is/will be taken to prevent/minimize energy losses at each stage.

External lights are/will be controlled through timers for auto on/off function based on timings.

Periodic monitoring of unit/plant/department wise for energy consumption.



Preparing annual energy activity plan.

ENERGY PLAN - 2016

A) Energy Saving by means Installed VFDs monitored monthly basis.

The Actual Saving is 3532 kW against 2490.5 kW (Target Saving as per CP).

Table No: 8.4.1 Details of Energy Saving for the year 2016

No. Project Details

Capex Details

Date of

commissioni

ng

Average

Actual

saving in

KW From

01/04/10.

(B)

Variance

in KW

C=( B-A )

Jun-16

Saving in

KW.

Jun-16

Saving in

KWH.

Jun-16

Saving

in Lacs. @

4.65

Rs/kwh

Total

Saving

till date

in MWH.

Total

Saving

till date

in

Lacs.

Date Value in

Lacs.

Projected

saving

KW (A)

1 Smelter -3

Vent. blower 03/03/08 28.1 120 01/06/09 133 13 163 117,300 5.45 8,200 336.16

2 SA Fan boiler -

3 27/10/08 20 65 30/05/09 112 47 176 126,893 5.90 8,069 338.69

3 67-PU-122

PAP-2

Installed VFD

using In house

material.

150 08/04/09 188 38 115 77,741 3.61 8,989 369.57

4 SA Fan boiler -

4 29/05/09 42

41 21/10/2009 134 93 163 117,631 5.47 7,509 317.84

5 SA Fan boiler -

1 70 16/10/2009 55 -15 40 28,815 1.34 3,028 128.61

6 67-PU-22

PAP-1 12/04/09 20 126 01-08-2010 65 -61 14 7,390 0.34 2,969 124.37

7 PA fan boiler -

3 03/06/10 54.11 110 19/01/2010 237 127 257 185,011 8.60 12,910 560.45

8 SAP-3 SO2

Blower. 20/01/10 379 750 08-06-2010 750 0 750 535,500 24.90 31,226

1,374.7

9

9 ID Fan Boiler -

3 28/01/10 80.89 110 11-08-2010 286 176 322 231,504 10.76 13,591 597.68

10

FSA Scrubber

pump 67 PU

01

05/05/10 10 60 3/12/2010. 126 66 139 99,010 4.60 2,990 130.55

11

FSA Scrubber

pump 67 PU

02

05/05/10 10 93 13/02/2011 140 47 153 110,401 5.13 5,847 260.02

12

Smeler-

3 FRJS Pump

300 PU 03A.

24/05/10 15 70 18/02/2011 98 28 98 68,208 3.17 3,608 159.63

13

Smeler-

3 FRJS Pump

300 PU 03B.

24/05/10 15 70 18/03/2011 96 26 100 69,600 3.24 3,495 155.55

14

Conc. Dryer

Combustion

Air Fan (FA

01)

15 6.5 27/04/2011 7 0 7 4,524 0.21 143 6.56

15 CPP-3 PA fan

Boiler-4.

06-12-

2010 60.79 120 17/07/2011 221 101 209 150,228 6.99 9,204 411.26



16 CPP-3 ID fan

Boiler-4.

06-12-

2010 58.76 120 17/07/2011 305 185 314 226,015 10.51 12,823 573.07

17 CPP-1 PA fan

Boiler-1.

11-01-

2012 63 173 19-05-2013 161 -12 201 144,718 6.73 3,864 177.12

18 CPP-1 ID fan

Boiler-1.

11-01-

2012 63 236 19-05-2013 315 79 311 224,046 10.42 7,790 357.37

Total for Jun-

16. 823.65 2490.50 Total actual 3454 964 3532

2,524,53

5 117.39

Grand Total (since commissioning) 147,054 6,413.6

2

B) Conservation of Energy recorded for the year 2015-16

Table No. 8.4.2 Energy conservation measures by Energy Cell Team (2015-16)

Sr.

No.

Energy Saving Saving

(KW)

01 In Smelter 1, One Cooling Towr Fan stopped in Combined

Cooling Tower and 32 CV 07 Delta Star Feeder Installed,

Converter FO Heater Job done

32.87

02 In Smelter 3,Stopped one P & I Compressor(Sm-3)

Stopped one hydraulic Pump of ASWM on 6-10-15

Stopped one hydraulic Pump of APM on 23-10-15

532

03 PAP 3 Cooling Tower Pump motor rating decreased to

450KW/1000RPM from 550KW/1500RPM. Energy save by

325KW/Hr and in Rs. 90 Lakhs/Annum.

VFD installation in Weak Acid pump(67PU-20) and

scrubbing pump(66PU-107)

343

04 Filter Supply pump - CCR 1

Utility Area Capacitor Bank Installation (WTP/ETP)

CCR Capacitor Bank Installation

PCC-44 (Capacitor Installation) Refinery 2

Refinery-1, APM one motor 75 KW kept off

245

05 Electrical :

1) Installation of Led Light in Plant - 13.5KW

Oxygen - Operation : (Specific Power Reduced)

2) Replaced Intercooler (Booster / Turbine booster after

cooler.- 80KW

3) Blac 2, Replaced First & Third Stage Intercooler - 241KW

4) OP5 MAC 1, Replaced contour ring & other spare in

compressor - 223KW

5) OP1,4 & 5 Filter unit replaced - 72KW

629.5

TOTAL ENERGY SAVING (in KW) 1782.37



C) Investments and proposals, in process of implementation for reduction of energy consumption.

Table No: 8.4.3 CAPEX Approved – spillover for the year 2015

Sr.

No.

Energy Saving Savings

(KW)

A) By Installation of VFD

01 Raw Water Pump - 5 9.4

02 Soft Water Pump of WTP - 2 12.3

03 Plant Water Pump 7.7

B) By Installation of

Capacitors

01 Improvement of P.F in few distribution

Transformers in process area at 3.3 kV & 433 volts

to reduce distribution/system copper losses

14.74

C) By Installation of Soft starter/VFD for

Conveyors

01 Installation of soft starter cum energy saver

(Continuous in operation) for Motor of Screen feed

elevator in PAP and SCF Conveyor with Cable.

21.06

TOTAL ENERGY SAVING (in KW) 65.2

ENERGY PLAN - 2017

Sr. No. Identification of Energy Saving Projects (Under

Evaluation)

Savings

(KW)

01 Anode caster cooling tower pump VFD installation in

Smelter 1

10

02 Planned to changed Jacket cooling tower pump and

combined cooling tower pump in Smelter 1

80

03 Anode Caster Vapour exhaust fan and Weir bowl

pump , replacing existing motor with low rating

motor

70

04 Leaching Autoclave agitator ,replacing existing motor

with low rating motor

8

05 VFD installation in scrubbing Pump 6 Nos. 23

06 Installation of new compressor with VFD 213

07 CWP TG-2 , potential saving 72

08 CEP TG-5 VFD installation 18

09 Cooling water pump OP-4, installation of VFD/ new

small motor

90

TOTAL ENERGY SAVING (in KW) 584

Thus, as it is evident from the above that the company emphasis on Energy Saving and Conservation.



8.5 GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN

The plan for attenuation of the noise and air pollutant level includes design for greenbelt/plantation around

plant boundary, roadside, office buildings and stretches of open land. The vegetation for the attenuation of air

pollution shall be most needed in the areas where ground level concentrations of the pollutant are likely to be

high. The main objective of green belt development is to provide a barrier between the source of pollution and

the surrounding area. The greenbelt helps to capture the fugitive emission and to attenuate the noise generated

apart from improving the aesthetics. Development of green belt shall also prevent soil erosion and washing

away of the topsoil besides helping in stabilizing the functional ecosystem, making the climate more

conducive and restore water balance.

The greenbelt has already been developed in the existing premises of Birla Copper. The unit has already

developed 106 hectors as greenbelt. The unit has already planted 3,47,719 numbers of plantation species and

unit will also plant more 250 numbers of plantation species in the proposed expansion.



Photograph of Existing Greenbelt



Table No. 8.4.4 Existing Trees in the premises

Sr.

No. Scientific Name Common Name Nos.

1. Azadirachta indica Neem 75,000

2. Ficus religiosa Peepal 1,500

3. Acacia Arabica Babul 1,43,319

4. Annona Squamosa Sitaphal 2,000

5. Musa Sapientum Banana 200

6. Inga Dulces Imli 54,000

7. Albezzialebbeck Siris 2,000

8. Casurina equisetifolia Saru 14,000

9. Thespesia Populnea Paras Pipal 36,000

10. Delonix regia Gulmohar 300

11. Terminalia Cattapa Badam 19,400

Total 3,47,719

Plantation work:

During the proposed expansion additional 250 trees shall be planted within three years. A 10-15 m wide green

belt shall be proposed on periphery of the area. Further, avenue plantation will be undertaken along the



roadside of the plant. Extensive afforestation at plant area will be undertaken which will not only act as lung

space in the area but will also improve aesthetics. Multi-layered plantation comprising of medium height trees

(7 m to 10 m) and shrubs (5 m height) are proposed for the green belt. Moreover, in future creepers will be

planted along the boundary wall to enhance its insulation capacity.

Area cover for green belt development:

The greenbelt development will be according to the guidelines prescribed by the Central Pollution Control

Board (CPCB), New Delhi. The proponent has planned to develop the Green Belt Area within a plot premises.

Selection of Species for Greenbelt

Development of Green Belt is one of the most sensitive issues and shall be done with due care. Selection of

proper locally grown species in addition to checking of their growth rate, quality, thickness of canopy cover,

etc. shall be duly done as it helps in abatement of fugitive noise, reduce the pollution level, thus making the

place worth dwelling for the diversified species of flora. The plant species suitable for greenbelt development

need to be selected based on the following criteria:

Fast growing

Thick canopy cover

Perennial and evergreen

Large leaf area index

High sink potential

While making choice of plant species for cultivation in green belts, weightage has to be given to the natural

factor of bio-climate. It is also presumed that the selected plants will be grown as per normal horticultural or

forestry practices.

For effective removal of pollutants, it is necessary that (1) plants grow under conditions of adequate nutrition

supply (2) absence of water stress (to maintain openness of stomatal apertures and form of epidermal

structures), and (3) are well-exposed to atmospheric conditions of light and breeze (i.e., away from

engineering structures hindering free flow of air) to maintain free interaction with gases.

For adsorption of gases:

Longer duration of foliage

Freely exposed foliage, through

Adequate height of crown



Openness of foliage in canopy

Big leaves (long & broad laminar surface)

Large number of stomatal apertures

Stomata well-exposed (in level will the general epidermal surface)

For removal of suspended particular matter:

Height and spread of crown

Leaves supported on firm petioles

Abundance of surface on bark and foliage, through

Roughness of bark

Epidermal outgrowth on petioles

Abundance of auxiliary hairs

Hair or scales on laminar surfaces

Stomata protected (by wax, arches/rings, hairs, etc.)

In view of this, the list species suggested to be planted in the greenbelt area is illustrated below. The suitable

variety/species shall be finalized in consultation with Local Forest Officer & Horticultural Experts. Mixed

plantations shall be done keeping optimum spacing between the saplings.

List of Species for Selection for Greenbelt Development

Species Common

Name Species

Common

Name

Achras zapota Sapota Leucaena

lucocephala Sdubabul

Albizia sps. Siris Mangifera indica Mango

Azadirachta indica Neem Mellingtonia

hortensis Gagana mallige

Agave Sps. Agave Moringa Olefera Drum stick

Bombavceiba Silk cotton Peltophorum

ferruginium Peltophorum

Bouhinia purpuria Geranium tree Pthecellobium dulce English Mile



Species Common

Name Species

Common

Name

Caesalpinia coriera Divi divi Polyalthea pendula Ashoka

Cassia siamea Ironwood Pongamia pinnata Karanja

Cassia asiatica Cassia Samania saman Rain Tree

Dalbergia sissoo Sissu Sapindus

emarginatus Soapnut

Delonix regia Gulmohar Sesbania sesban Agastehi

Feronia elephantum Elephant apple Spadthodia

companulata Spathodia

Ficus bengalensis Banyan Syzigium cumini Jamun

Ficus glomurala White Ficus Syzizium guzuva Guava

Ficus religiosa Aswath Tamarindus indica Tamarind

Hardiwickia binata Iron Wood Tectona grandis Teak

Holoptelia Integrifolia Chilbil Tekoma species Tekoma

Jacaranda mimosaefolia Jackaranda Terminalia bellirica Myrobalan

Jatropha Circas Jatropha Terminalia catappa Badam

Lagerstroemia

flosreginae

Benteak Thespesia populnea Badam

Harivana Harivana Carica Papaya Papaya

Sesbania sesban Agasthi Psidium Guajava Guava

All the above said species are common species used for green belt development. Other than these, specific

dust absorbing as well as noise absorbing species will be planted in the greenbelt which will reduce the

concentration of dust and noise levels in the premises.

Dust Absorber species Noise attenuation Species

Species Common Name Species Common Name

Azadirachta indica Neem Terminalia tomentoas Asan

Melia azaderach Mahaneem Acacia auriculiformis Babul

Terminalia arjuna Arjun Polyalthia longifolia Debdari

Cassia fistula Amaltas Ficus benghalensis banyan

Bauhinia variegate Kachnar Magnifera indica Aam



Green belt Development Programme

Year No. of trees/plants to be planted in

plant area

2017-2018 50

2018-2019 100

2019-2020 100

8.6 DRAINAGE & RAINWATER HARVESTING PLAN

The effectiveness of the drainage system depends on proper cleaning of drainage pipes/channels etc. Regular

checking before & during the monsoon is done to see that none of the drains/drainage facilities are clogged

and are efficient to collect the rainwater under rain water harvesting program. The clogged drains are cleaned

up immediately on report of any clogging or blockage. This checking and cleaning is meticulous during the

monsoon season, especially if heavy rains are forecasted.

Rainwater harvesting plan

The first rainwater will not be collected and it will be allowed to be discharged as storm water. The second

rainwater and subsequent rainwater will be conveyed to the Rainwater collection system. Rainwater falling

on the entire main shop, ADM building, ware house & will be transferred to storage tank through closed

pipes or separate drain channel. This water will be utilized for fire-fighting, gardening and other ancillary

purposes and thereby reducing the water consumption. This water will be enabling to reduce to fresh water

withdrawal from GIDC water supply.

Quantity of rainwater can be harvested:

Total Area for roof top harvesting : 3900 m2

Average Rainfall : 980 mm

Total Rain Water that can be harvested per year : (3900) * (0.98) * (0.9)

: 3440 m3



FIGURE 8.1: PLANT LAYOUT SHOWING GREENBELT



8.7 BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR EMS:

The total project cost for proposed expansion will be INR 240 crores. The capital cost of environmental

control system, which include air pollution control device, waste management facilities, greenbelt

development and environmental monitoring would be 20 lacs. The APC, additional greenbelt, safety measures

and other components of the EMP shall be implemented along with the commissioning expansion work. The

annual recurring cost of environmental control for the proposed project has been estimated to be 20 lacs of the

total EMS cost. The Budgetary Provision made for environmental management is briefly illustrated below:

COST BREAK-UP FOR ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS)

No. Particular

Existing Cost

(INR lacs)

2015-16 *

Proposed Cost

(INR lacs)

Total Cost

(INR lacs)

1

Total EMS Cost




7788 20 7808

TOTAL 7788 20 7808

*Note: This also includes the other existing plants.

RECURRING COST PER ANNUM

No. Particular Proposed (INR

Lacs/annum)

1

Environment & Safety Management System,

greenbelt maintenance, solid/hazardous waste

disposal

20

TOTAL 20



8.8 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL:

Birla Copper has already formulated the Environmental Management Cell for its existing unit and the same

shall be responsible for all activities after the proposed expansion. EMC involves personnel of plant level as

well as corporate level for interaction with technical & statutory bodies to deal with environmental

requirements/issues at all level. Senior General Manager is head of the Environmental Management Cell with

subordinates involving Manager, Sr. Engineer, Jr. engineer, Lab technician, helpers etc. The EMC carries

out/will carry out the monitoring of the stack emission, noise level, analysis of water etc. and keeps/will keep

the regional / local statutory body informed about the status of pollution control.

It is the prime responsibility of Head of EMC to ensure that any non-conformity are addressed/shall be

addressed, the EMP is/shall be implemented & operated efficiently to prevent/control pollution during

operational phase of proposed project as well as to improve the environmental health of the area. The head of

EMC is/shall be responsible for reporting any non-compliance to higher authority and stakeholders. The

proponent already arranges professional training for personnel of EMC at plant level which is provided/shall

be provided in area of monitoring and continuous analysis of the pollutants, legal requirement and

environmental management system.

The EMC acts/will also act to ensure efficient & proper implementation of EMP & mitigation measures

suggested for control/prevention of pollution, recycling/reuse of wastewater, conservation of environmental

quality, greenbelt as well as occupational health & safety etc. The Environmental Management Cell of the

company has the following organizational structure.



Environmental management Cell (EMC)

8.9 SOCIAL WELFARE & UPLIFTMENT PLAN

The proponent is actively involved in the improvement of society through its contribution in social welfare

activities & programmes. It directly organizes various programmes for social welfare & upliftment or

indirectly contributes in such activities conducted by other organizations by providing financial & other aid.

The proponent is committed to contribute in social welfare & upliftment activities on regular basis. Birla

Copper will continue such activities to fulfill the requirements of its social responsibility under CSR

Programs.

The proponent has been actively engaged in social welfare activities from the past many years. Proponent

had contributes towards the many activities such as education, sustainable livelihood, community health,

infrastructure development, etc. for the financial year April 2015 to March 2016 and spent about Rs. 260

lakhs.


company will propose a detailed CSR Plan. Under this plan, the proponent has allocated a budget of Rs.



6.22 Crores within 5 years. Activities under the following areas have been identified and shall be carried

out:

Education







CHAPTER-9

SUMMARY & CONCLUSION



capacity in the existing Copper Smelter Complex. Hindalco Industries Limited located at GIDC Industrial

area, Survey No. 29 to 39,101,104 to 110,112 to 115,117 to 122 of village Dahej (Plot No. 2 of Dahej GIDC)

and Survey No 646 to 671, 679, 685, 732 to 742, 744 to 752 of Village: Lakhigam, Taluka: Vagra, Dist:

Bharuch, Gujarat. Hindalco Industries Limited envisages to use a state of art technology, adopting modernized

machineries/equipment and novel process technologies. The unit has obtained CC&A of GPCB Vide letter

No: AWH-62117, 11/06/2014, which is valid upto 02/03/2020. Unit has also obtained Environmental

Clearance from Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change (MoEFCC), New Delhi.

9.1 PROJECT LOCATION

9.1.1 PROJECT SITE

The proposed expansion project of Hindalco Industries Limited will be carried out at the existing Copper

Smelter Complex located at Survey No. 29 to 39,101,104 to 110,112 to 115,117 to 122 of village Dahej

(Plot No. 2 of Dahej GIDC) and Survey No 646 to 671, 679, 685, 732 to 742, 744 to 752 of Village:

Lakhigam, Taluka: Vagra, Dist: Bharuch, Gujarat. The approx. geographical co-ordinates of the unit are

21042‘ N Latitude & 72033‘E Longitude. Total area under possession of Birla Copper is 327 Ha out of

which 4680 sq.meter area will be utilized for proposed expansion from existing spare land & the total

investment for the proposed expansion will be Rs. 240 Crores. The site is well connected by rail and road.

Nearest railway station from project site is Bharuch which is approximately 55 km towards East. The site is

connected by road with NH-8 which is around 46 km towards East site from the project site. State highway

No-6 is 5.5 km away from the project site. The nearest town from project site is Dahej, which is located

about 4.8 km away. Dahej is the largest industrial estate with many small scale & medium scale industries.



9.1.2 SALIENT FEATURES OF THE PROJECT SITE

Particulars Details

Approx. Geographical Co-ordinates Approx. Center 21°42‘09.48‖ N Latitude &

72°32‘15.95‖ E

Village Lakhigam: appx. 1.65 km –SE


Nearest Town Bharuch: appx. 46.90 km – E

Nearest Sea Coast Appx.2.56 km –W

Nearest Highway State Highway (SH) No: 206 – appx. 2 km SE

National Highway- appx. 08: 47 km – E

Nearest Railway Station Dahej Railway line: appx. 5.75 km–NEE

Bharuch Railway Station: appx. 47.20 km –SE

Nearest Airport Bhavnagar Airport: appx. 37.40 km – WWN

Surat Airport: appx. 67.60 km –WWE

National parks/ sanctuaries None within 10 km radial periphery

Densely Populated or built – up Area Bharuch town: appx. 46.90 km – E

Note: All the above mentioned distances are the aerial distances from project site.



9.3 RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS

No Resource Details

1 Land 4680 sq. meter (Existing unit has a total plot area of 327 Ha

within which the proposed expansion will be carried out. Hence,

no additional land will be required for the proposed expansion)

2 Water Source: GIDC water supply

Existing: 650.0 KLD

Proposed: 408.0 KLD

Total: 1058.0 KLD

3 Electricity

Source: DGVCL

Existing Power requirement: 40 MW

Captive Power Plant: 135 MW

Power requirement of existing CCR plant :1300 KW

Additional Power requirement after proposed expansion: 2500

KW

4 Fuel Existing: LNG - 30000 SCM / Day.

Proposed expansion : LNG - 27000 SCM/Day

Total: LNG - 57000 SCM/Day.

5 Man power Existing: 3478

Existing CCR: 107

Proposed CCR: 43



9.4 RAW MATERIAL REQUIREMENT

Raw Materials Unit Unit

Consumption per

MT

Quantity (TPM)


Copper Cathode* MT 1.00 20000 20334 40334

IPA Solution Ltr. 0.75 1500 1525 3025

Coolant Ltr. 0.0625 1250 1271 2521

9.6 PRODUCT & CAPACITY

Name of Product

Capacity TPA


Continuous Cast Copper Rod * 2,40,000 2,44,000 * 4,84,000



9.7 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

The baseline environmental study was carried out for the various environmental components viz, Air,

Water, Soil, Ecology and biodiversity, Socioeconomic and Noise. The study was conducted for the period

March 2016 to May 2016. Before the finalization of sampling locations to carry out the environmental

monitoring and survey our field area expert had visited the site. All the locations have been selected within

10 Km radius from the project site as per the requirement of TOR & environmental samples were collected

from the selected locations of the study area. Primary data for flora, fauna and socio economic were

collected to verify the secondary data. Sources of secondary data were various literatures published like

Census of India –2011, Environment Information Centre-Delhi, Forest department, District & Village

Panchayat, Internet etc. The scenario of environmental condition of the area was revealed from the sample

& data analysis that is described below in subsequent paragraphs.

Table No 9.1: Frequency of Environmental Monitoring

Attributes

Sampling

Locations Parameters Frequency

A. Air Environment

Meteorological Data Nr. Project Site Temperature, Relative

Humidity, Precipitation

Wind direction, Wind

Speed

Hourly data from Mar

2016 to May 2016

Ambient Air Quality 8 locations in the study

area of 10 km radius.

PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx,

NH3, CO

24 hourly basis, twice a

week during study

period.

B. Noise 8 locations in the study

area of 10 km radius

Noise Levels in dB(A) Once in Study Period

C. Water

Ground Water Samples from 5 Locations


the project site.

Physical, Chemical,

Microbiological and

Heavy Metal


Surface Water Samples from 1 Location


the project site.

Physical, Chemical,

Microbiological and

Heavy Metal


Marine Water Samples from 1 Location

during high tide and low

tide.

Physical, Chemical,

Microbiological,

Biological, Heavy Metal

and Sediment Sample




D. Soil Quality Samples from 8 locations


the project site.

Physical, Chemical

Characteristics, Soil

Texture


E. Land Use & Land

Cover


study area

Existing Land use pattern --

F. Ecological Data Within 10 Km radius of

study area

Existing Flora & Fauna Once in Study Period

G. Socioeconomic

Data


study area

Socio-economic

characteristics of the

affected area


Table No.9.2: Method of Environmental Sampling & Analysis

Attributes

Methods

Sampling/Preservation Analysis

B. Air Environment

Meteorological Data Data collected on hourly basis using

wind monitor as per CPCB Guideline. NA

Ambient air quality As per IS: 5182, CPCB & AWMA. As per IS:5182,CPCB & AWMA

B. Noise Instrument : Noise level meter Survey carried out as per EPA

C. Water

Ground Water Standard Methods for Examination of

Water and Wastewater, 22nd

edition,

APHA 2012

IS 3025 & Standard Methods for

Examination of Water and

Wastewater, 22nd

edition, APHA

2012

Surface Water

D. Soil Quality IS 2720, Soil Testing in India


Cooperation)

IS 2720, Laboratory developed

Method as per NABL requirement and

Guideline and Soil Testing in India


Cooperation)

E. Land Use & Land

Cover

Land use map prepared by field area expert by visual image interpretation using

data of IRS P6 LISS III, NRSC Satellite image (2009), Hyderabad.

F.Ecology&

Biodiversity Data







G. Socioeconomic

Data





Table No 9.3: Baseline Status of the study area:

Physiography Proposed site is located in district Bharuch

The nearest city/ town to the project site is Dahej

Meteorology During the study period minimum temperature was recorded as 16.2

0C on

3rd

Mar 2016 and maximum temperature was recorded as 45.8oC on 28

th

May 2016.

Humidity was observed between 15.0 to 94.0 %.

Average wind speed data varies in the range of 1.1 to 9.9 km/hr during

study period.

Rainfall: No rainfall recorded during the study period.

Ambient air quality During the study PM2.5 was observed between 36.5–53.8µg/m

3.

Maximum concentration of PM2.5 was found at Birla Copper Jetty.

PM10 was observed in the range of 67.0–96.1µg/m3.

Maximum

concentration of PM10 was found at Birla Copper Jetty. All the results of

PM10 were found well within the prescribed norms.

SO2 concentration was observed in the range of 9.1-18.3 µg/m3, which is

well within the standard limit.

NOx concentration in Ambient Air quality was between 14.3 –25.6µg/m3,

which is well within the standard limit.

Monitoring and analysis was also carried out for NH3 & CO. Result for

the parameters viz, NH3, and CO were found well within the norms.

On the basis of test results found during the survey it can be concluded

that the ambient air quality of the study region is good as all the results

are well within the limit

Noise level Maximum noise level was recorded 73.1 dB(A) during day time at Project

site while the equivalent noise level was 68.1 dB(A) which is well within

the limit for industrial zone

Water resources &

quality

Surface Water Quality

During the analysis pH of the samples was found 7.42.

TDS analysis was also carried out for surface water sample and it was



found 340 mg/L.

DO measured during analysis was found 4.3 mg/L.

COD & BOD analysis was also carried out during the study period and it

was found more than desirable value for drinking water.

All other results were found within drinking water acceptable norms

MPN test was also carried out for this surface water sample and it was

found positive. It indicates towards the faecal contamination in surface

water body.

Test results comparison study with Inland Surface Water Classification

(CPCB Standards) reveals that water cannot be used directly for drinking

purpose as MPN and other microbial test were found positive. This water

can be used in washing and irrigation purpose. Bathing and drinking

should not be allowed for this water body without disinfection.

Ground Water Quality

pH range was observed between 7.26 -7.83 within the specified limit.

Total dissolved solids were recorded in the range of 285 to 13010 mg/L

with minimum at Lakhigam and maximum at project site. Results of

TDS for project site and Ambetha village do not meet as per the drinking

water norms.

Total hardness was in the range of 135-1810 mg/L with minimum at

Lakhigam village & maximum at Project Site.

Total Alkalinity was found in the range of 118-1430 mg/L with

minimum at Lakhigam village & maximum at Project Site.

All the heavy metals were found well within the range of prescribed

standards, found to be slightly higher side. Fluoride was also within the

range of prescribed limit in all the samples.

As microbiological parameters MPN analysis was also carried out and it

was found Nil.

On the basis of test results it is summarized that water quality of

Lakhigam, Luvara and Dahej meet with the standard IS 10500 – 2012.

Water can be used for drinking purpose except Project site and Ambetha

village in absence of alternate source.

Marine Water Quality

Temperature is an important parameter, which affects the living



organisms. The temperature of the water was less than ambient air

temperature.

The pH variation was observed in a narrow range of 7.38 to 7.39. pH

range is maintained due to buffering action of CO2,CO3-2

and HCO3-2

.

Salinity was observed in the range of 34500 to 35200 mg/L which is near

to the expected value.

DO is an essential parameter which affects the biotic component of the

water. Fish and other aquatic life take oxygen through the gill. DO levels

affect the aerobic bacterial population as well as chlorophyllous

Phytoplankton. During study period maximum DO level was recorded up

to 4.4 mg/L during low tide which is as per expected value.

BOD is also an important parameter to define the environmental scenario

of marine ecosystem as it affects the DO level. BOD was found in the

range of <4 to 5 mg/L. During Low tide BOD reaches up to 5 mg/L

while it <4 mg/L for High tide. Result of BOD during low tide is more

than expected value due to Industrial discharge.

Iron varies from 0.51 to 1.03 mg/L. Minimum value for Iron was

recorded during High tide. Other Heavy metals were found well within

the range.

Microbiological and biological analysis was also carried out for marine

water sample. Results for microbiological parameters show that marine

water is contaminated with animal as well as human faecal matter.

Soil quality Results of pH were varying in narrow range for one location to other

location from 7.04 to 8.02 during the study period. Overall the pH of all

the soil samples was found almost neutral.

Loss on ignition test was also carried out to know the probability of

Organic matter in the soil samples. Concentration of organic matter was

found in the range of 0.3 to 0.5%. Minimum Value was observed in the

samples of Project Site, Luvara & Ambetha village.

During analysis concentration of total Nitrogen was found in the range of

6.7 to 9.8 mg/100 gm. Minimum value was observed in the soil sample

of Lakhigam village.

SAR value has also been calculated during the survey and it was found in

the range of 3.3 to 5.4.

Total Phosphorous content was found in the range of 4.8 to 7.8



mg/100gm.

Average Calcium content ranged from 18.1 to 20.4 meq/100 gm and

magnesium content ranged from 9.7 to 13.3 meq/100 gm.

As a micronutrient analysis of Iron, Chromium, copper & Boron was

also carried out for all the soil samples & their presence was also noted.

Ecological Layout The data of flora & fauna were collected on visual observation during our

site visit and by reviewing various literatures.

Authenticity of the primary data was checked by reviewing the data

collected from Forest Department, EIC and different Taxonomy books.

Previous EIA reports of Dahej region were also referred during the

finalization of floral and faunal data.

The dominant species of flora is described in Section 3.9.1 of Chapter-3.

The species of fauna including birds, animals, fishes etc is described in

Table 3.9.2 of Chapter-3.

9.8 IMPACTING ACTIVITIES

Various activities involved in the proposed project are:

1. Construction phase activities

2. Operation phase activities

The activities identified for the proposed project under each phase are:

Construction phase

Site preparation and Construction for expansion

Site development for Greenbelt & Landscaping

Erection & Commissioning for full capacity of production

Operation phase

Operation of Machineries & Equipment

Handling & transportation of materials

Combustion of fuel & Emission from furnaces

Allied Operations (maintenance & services of machineries & equipment etc.)

Water Consumption, Wastewater Generation & Management

Solid/Hazardous Waste Generation & Management

Administrative, Domestic & Other Activities



9.9 IMPACT PREDICTION

Major Activities & Associated Potential Impacts


C. Construction Phase

1. Site preparation and Construction

of additional utility area.




materials.


transportation of construction materials.

Noise generation due to construction activities.

Stress on water resource due to consumption of

water in construction activities.

Construction waste generation & land

contamination.


construction works.

2. Erection & Commissioning of

additional machineries/equipment

for the proposed expansion.




materials.


transportation of equipment and machineries.

Noise generation due to erection &

commissioning activities.


construction works.




2 Site development for additional

greenbelt & landscaping

Major impacts are beneficial but will lead to

negligible (almost Nil) adverse impacts during

the site preparation activity.

D. Operation Phase

1 Operation of Machineries &

Equipment

Impacts on ambient noise due to operation of

Noise generating equipment/machineries.

Air emissions affecting the ambient air quality.


operational hazards.

2 Handling & transportation of

materials

Noise generation due to transportation vehicles.

Dust emissions due to handling and

transportation of materials.


Operational Hazards.

3 Emissions from emission sources Impacts on air due to emissions from furnaces.

Stress on ecological structure due to change in

GLC of various pollutants in emissions.

4 Allied operations (maintenance &

services of machineries &

equipment etc.)

Local impacts on noise environment due to

noise generation

Contamination of water due to wash down of

contaminant from work site in storm water

drainage

Occupational health issues associated with

Operational Hazards (mechanical & electrical,

heat, noise, vibration etc.)

5 Water consumption, wastewater Stresses on water resource due to water




generation & management consumption.

Generation of industrial & domestic

wastewater.

Contamination of water or land caused by

disposal of untreated/poorly treated effluent.

6 Administrative, domestic & other

activities

Impacts on water & land environment due to

sewage generation & disposal

9.10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

9.10.1 EMP FOR WATER MANAGEMENT

Environmental Issue Mitigation measure

Construction Phase

Load on resources by

consumption of water

Source of water will be GIDC Water Supply

Optimization of water consumption by reducing unusual runoff

from construction activity area.

RWH shall be carried out to within the plant premises.

Wastewater discharge No industrial wastewater will be generated during the

construction phase.

Existing sanitation facilities i.e. Sewage Treatment Plant for

disposal of sewage shall be provided for the construction

workers.

Proper drinking water supply facility for construction workers

shall be temporarily arranged.

Construction equipment shall be washed properly only at

designated washing area.



Operation Phase

Load on resources by

consumption of water

Additional water shall be withdrawn from the GIDC Water

Supply during the operation phase.

Ground water will not be extracted to meet the water

requirement for the proposed expansion. Hence, there will be no

impacts on ground water due to water consumption.

Regular recording of water consumption using flow meter.

Water shall be required only for cooling & coolant water make

up purpose.

Wastewater Treatment &

discharge/reuse/recycle

About 18.006 KLD of wastewater generation is generated

including sewage of 8.0 KLD.

After proposed expansion additional 14.006 KLD industrial and

6 KLD domestic wastewater will be generated due to proposed

expansion.

From the proposed expansion, there will be no wastewater

generation on daily basis from the manufacturing of CCR but

the only negligible generation of wastewater from the cleaning

of coolant water tank of rolling mill intermittently. This will be

about 1000 liters in six months (@0.006 KL/day).

Other wastewater will be generated from cooling tower blow

down i.e. 8 KLD for proposed expansion, this wastewater will

not be generated only on a daily basis but after number of

multiple continuous recycle it will be treated in existing ETP.

Additional effluent will be treated in existing ETP having spare

capacity.

The treated effluent is utilized for the lime slurry preparation,

make up in slag granulation and in gas cleaning system within

the premises.

Additional Sewage will be treated in existing sewage Treatment

Plant and treated sewage will be reused in process.

Regular maintenance, monitoring & checking of Effluent

Treatment Plant for its proper functioning shall be carried out by

the environment department.



All necessary requisites or materials shall be provided for

adequate functioning of the Effluent Treatment Plant.

Strict adherence to the disposal norms and prevention of

disposal on land or other water body shall be taken care of.

9.10.2 EMP for Air Management

Environmental Issue Mitigation measures

Construction Phase

Temporary increased

Emissions from construction

& commissioning operations

Adequately designed enclosed area/ provision of barricading

sheets for reduction of dusting during construction activity and

materials storage & handling.

Provision of water sprinkling system in construction area for

suppression of dust.

Water Sprinkling shall be done on earthen roads, stockpiles of

excavated earthen materials and soil to prevent dusting.

All vehicles engaged in construction work shall be compulsorily

PUC certified and covered properly in order to minimize the

material loss

All construction equipment, machineries & utilities shall be

maintained on regular basis to reduce emission.

Engines of idle machineries, equipment and vehicles to be turned

off when not in use.

Provision of necessary PPEs for employees engaged in activities

of storage, transportation & handling of materials as well as

construction & commissioning operations.

Operation Phase

Stationary emissions from

furnace

Since LNG will be used as a fuel, there is no chance of flue gas

emission.

Adequate height of 26 meter will be provided to the furnace

stack for the proper dispersion of pollutant as per CPCB

guidelines



Sampling port and stack monitoring facility shall be provided at

the proposed furnace.

The design stage endeavors to mitigate the problems related to

environment and health at the process technology/source level

itself. Besides standards, emphasis would be given to comply

with all design standards/ regulatory norms as specified by

CPCB/MoEFCC/GPCB etc.

No secondary fugitive emission will be generated from the

proposed expansion

The gas emission from the furnaces is/will be vented through

adequate height and dia. of chimney.

It is proposed to develop additional Green Belt within the

premises, which will intercept the dispersing particulates. Also

the sprinkling of water is recommended in areas where dust

emission is expected within the plant.

Ambient air monitoring shall be carried out by an independent

agency every month to assess particulate matter, SOx & NOx in

at different locations within the plant.

The internal roads of the plant are constructed from RCC to

minimize dusting due to transportation.



9.10.3 EMP for Waste Management


Construction Phase

Construction waste

management

Proper handling & transportation system for construction

wastes & stock piles of earthen materials.

Reuse of construction waste for PCC works, development of

roads and misc. filling for construction works.

Storage & handling of construction materials shall be done

properly to avoid spillage or leakage.

Vegetation clearance shall not be a major issue as the proposed

expansion will be carried out in the existing premises using

spare land.

Operation Phase

Hazardous/Non-Hazardous

Solid Waste management

No wastes shall be generated due to the proposed expansion,

hence no impacts are envisaged on the land environment.

Treatment, Storage & Disposal mode for the wastes generated

in the existing unit is followed as per Hazardous Waste

(Storage, Handling & Trans-boundary Movement) Third

Amendment Rules, 2016 and same shall be continued after the

proposed expansion.

A separate designated storage area is already provided with

sign boards/labels for each category of hazardous & solid

wastes. The same shall be utilized after the proposed

expansion.

Records of hazardous waste generation and disposal is

being/shall be maintained on printed logbook.



9.10.4 EMP for Noise Control


Construction Phase

Noise Noise generating & vibrating equipment like motors, pumps

etc. are/shall be mounted on sturdy concrete foundations with

rubber padding to reduce vibrations.

Greenbelt has been developed to help in attenuation of noise.

Regular lubrication & preventive maintenance shall be done to

reduce noise generation.

Movement of trucks and machinery shall be strictly regulated

during daytime to reduce the impacts of increased noise.

Idle vehicles, construction equipment & other machineries

shall be turned off to avoid unwanted noise generation.

Ear plugs/muff shall be provided to all construction

workers/employees at place of high noise levels.

Operation Phase

Noise For abatement of noise arising from equipment/machineries;

acoustic enclosures, silencers or mufflers, anti-vibrating pads

shall be provided, wherever possible.

Ventilated control pulpits will be provided for working in

noisy areas.

Vibration isolation will be provided for fans.

Regular monitoring of noise pressure level will be conducted

inside and outside shops.

Checking leakage in high pressure steam pipelines and

carrying out maintenance.

Providing silencers in exhaust line of steam vents.

Rotation of workers working in high noise area as per OSHA

guideline.

Adequate greenbelt is/shall be developed and maintained

around high noise generating area as well as plant premises to



help in attenuation of noise.

Regular lubrication & preventive maintenance is being/shall be

done to reduce vibration & noise generation.

Use of PPE like ear plugs and ear muffs is/shall be made

compulsory near the high noise generating machines.

Moreover, the personnel are/will be provided breaks in their

working hours, with the continuous exposure not increasing

three (3) hours.

9.11 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

9.10.1 RISK ASSESSMENT

Hindalco Industries Limited (Unit: Birla Copper), GIDC Industrial area, village Dahej, Dist: Bharuch, Gujarat.

Gujarat is metallurgical industry engaged in manufacturing of Cast Copper Rod and now proposes to expand

their production capacity.

Several activities like material handling, charging of molten scrap, continuous casting, etc. are carried out at

the site. Some of the hazards associated with these activities are burn injury, falls, exposure to fumes, exposure

to high temperature, etc.

More comprehensive, systematic and sophisticated methods of Safety Engineering, such as, Hazard

Identification and Qualitative/Quantitative Risk Assessment have been developed to improve upon the

integrity, reliability and safety of industrial plants.

In Qualitative Risk Assessment, risk has been analyzed using methodology called HIRA-Hazards

Identification & Risk Assessment. In HIRA, major manual activities carried out by plant personnel as well as

contract labors have been considered. Qualitative Risk Assessment has been carried out for the areas as

mentioned above.

9.10.2 DISASTER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HIL has prepared the Disaster Management Plan (onsite/offsite emergency plan) to minimize human, property

and economic losses. The purpose of this plan is to provide the proponent with means to effectively utilize all

the resources at its disposal for the protection of life, environment and property. The same DMP shall be

updated after expansion to cover new plants or facilities. The details of the same are discussed in the following

sections.



HIL has developed an emergency management team. The management structure includes the following

personnel and their roles at the time of emergency:

Incident Controllers

Deputy Incident Controllers

Site Main Controller (SMC)

Key Personnel‘s

The other elements of Disaster Management Plan are:

Assembly points

Emergency control center

Fire control arrangements

Medical arrangements

Other arrangements

9.12 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH, SAFETY & HOUSEKEEPING

The company is very much concerned in terms of health, safety and environment protection. The company

has a ‗Health, Safety & Environment Policy‘ for taking care of the health and safety of its employees.

The following key safety measures are a part of the Health & Safety policy of the company and shall be

followed even after the proposed expansion:

1. Safety Training is provided to the employees.

2. Safety Sirens with Alarm System in case of emergency are provided.

3. Emergency Control Room is established.

4. Assembly point are defined for safe gathering of the employees during the times of emergency.

5. Fire Hydrant System is installed.

6. Fire Extinguishers are provided.

7. Mock drills are periodically conducted and factors like response time are evaluated.

8. Fire squad team is formed for handling any emergency situation & regular training of squad team is

conducted.



9. First Aid Facility and training are provided.

10. Personal protective gears and equipment are provided to employees.

11. Health checkups are organized at regular intervals.

12. Health check-ups shall be organized at regular intervals.

Housekeeping

Proper housekeeping is an essential part of sound environmental management. It will be rigorously seen that

there is no accumulation of wastes, especially combustible wastes inside the plant area. In summer dry grasses

& vegetation growing inside the plant area will be cut and removed. All firefighting equipment and warning

devices will be kept in perfect working conditions at all the times. It will be seen that all personnel are aware of

the implications of environmental pollution and simple practices to avoid pollution.

9.13 GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN

The plan for attenuation of the noise and air pollutant level includes design for greenbelt/plantation around

plant boundary, roadside, office buildings and stretches of open land. The vegetation for the attenuation of air

pollutants shall be most needed in the areas where ground level concentrations of the pollutants are to be

highest.

Green belt development plan:

The greenbelt has already been developed in the existing premises of Birla Copper. The unit has already

developed greenbelt in 106 hectors. The unit has already planted 3,47,719 numbers of plantation species

within the premises. A 20-25 m wide green belt shall be proposed on periphery of the area. Further, additional

avenue plantation will be undertaken around 1500 Sq.meter along the roadside of the plant. Extensive

afforestation at plant area will be undertaken which will not only act as lung space in the area but will also

improve aesthetics. Multi-layered plantation comprising of medium height trees (7 m to 10 m) and shrubs (5

m height) are proposed for the green belt. Moreover, in future creepers will be planted along the boundary

wall to enhance its insulation capacity.



Green belt Development Programme

Year No. of trees/plants to be planted in

plant area

2017-2018 50

2018-2019 100

2019-2020 100

9.14 RAINWATER HARVESTING PLAN

The effectiveness of the drainage system depends on proper cleaning of drainage pipes/channels etc. Regular

checking before & during the monsoon is done to see that none of the drains/drainage facilities are clogged

and are efficient to collect the rainwater under rain water harvesting program. The clogged drains are cleaned

up immediately on report of any clogging or blockage. This checking and cleaning is meticulous during the

monsoon season, especially if heavy rains are forecasted.

Rainwater falling on the entire main shop, ADM building, ware house & will be transferred to storage tank

through closed pipes or separate drain channel. Approx. 3440 m3 of rain water will be collected. This water

will be utilized for fire-fighting, gardening and other ancillary purposes and thereby reducing the water

consumption. This water will be enabling to reduce to fresh water withdrawal from GIDC water supply.

9.15 BUDGETARY PROVISIONS FOR EMS:

The total project cost for proposed expansion will be INR 240 crores. The capital cost of environmental

control system, which include air pollution control device, waste management facilities, greenbelt

development and environmental monitoring would be 20 lacs. The APC, additional greenbelt, safety measures

and other components of the EMP shall be implemented along with the commissioning expansion work. The

annual recurring cost of environmental control for the proposed project has been estimated to be 6.22 crores

of the total EMS cost. The Budgetary Provision made for environmental management is briefly illustrated

below:



COST BREAK-UP FOR ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS)

No. Particular

Existing Cost

(INR lacs)

2015-16 *

Proposed Cost

(INR lacs)

Total Cost

(INR lacs)

1

Total EMS Cost




7788 20 7808

TOTAL 7788 20 7808

*Note: This also includes the other existing plants.

9.16 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL

HIL has already formulated the Environmental Management Cell for its existing unit and the same shall be

responsible for all activities after the proposed expansion. EMC involves personnel of plant level as well as

corporate level for interaction with technical & statutory bodies to deal with environmental requirements/issues

at all level. General Manager is head of the Environmental Management Cell with subordinates involving Dy.

Manager, Sr. Engineer, Jr. engineer, Lab technician, Chemist, supervisors, Operators, etc. The EMC carries

out/oversees the monitoring of the stack emission, noise level, analysis of water etc. and keeps the regional /

local statutory body informed about the status of pollution control.

It is the prime responsibility of Head of EMC to ensure that any non-conformity are addressed, the EMP is

implemented & operated efficiently to prevent/control pollution during operational phase of proposed project

as well as to improve the environmental health of the area. The head of EMC shall be responsible for reporting

any non-compliance to higher authority and stakeholders. The proponent already arranges professional training

for personnel of EMC at plant level which shall be provided in area of monitoring and continuous analysis of

the pollutants, legal requirement and environmental management system.

The EMC acts/will also act to ensure efficient & proper implementation of EMP & mitigation measures

suggested for control/prevention of pollution, recycling/reuse of wastewater, conservation of environmental

quality, greenbelt as well as occupational health & safety etc. Conceptually, the Environmental Management

Cell has the following organizational structure.



9.18 SOCIAL WELFARE & UPLIFTMENT PLAN

The proponent is actively involved in the improvement of society through its contribution in social welfare

activities & programmes. It directly organizes various programmes for social welfare & upliftment or

indirectly contributes in such activities conducted by other organizations by providing financial & other aid.

The proponent is committed to contribute in social welfare & upliftment activities on regular basis. Birla

Copper will continue such activities to fulfill the requirements of its social responsibility under CSR

Programs.

The proponent has been actively engaged in social welfare activities from the past many years. Proponent had

contributes towards the many activities such as education, sustainable livelihood, community health,

infrastructure development etc from April 2015 to March 2016 and spent about Rs. 260 lakhs.




company will propose a detailed CSR Plan. Under this plan, the proponent has allocated a budget of Rs. 6.22

Crores within five years of period. Activities under the following areas have been identified and shall be

carried out:

Education





9.18 CONCLUSION



capacity in the existing Copper Smelter Complex.

Hindalco Industries Limited envisages to use a state of art technology, adopting modernized

machineries/equipment and novel process technologies. The unit has obtained CC&A of GPCB Vide letter

No: AWH-62117, 11/06/2014, which is valid upto 02/03/2020. Unit has also obtained Environmental

Clearance from Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change (MoEFCC), New Delhi.

The EIA study has been carried out with respect to the TORs awarded by MoEFCC, New Delhi. All the

impacts likely to have an effect on the environment have been identified and efficient/adequate mitigation

measures have been proposed for the same.

Considering the probability of likely impacts, the proponent has planned adequate mitigation measures and

EMP. Further, the proponent also undertakes CSR activities which shall have beneficial impacts on the socio-

economic environment. Measures like rainwater harvesting, energy conservation and greenbelt development

are also noteworthy. Looking to the overall project scenario, employment potential and allied development

plans; it has been noticed that the proposed expansion would significantly help in the improvement of the

society and nation at large.

All the relevant safety norms with latest technology have been incorporated in the proposed expansion

project. Hazards and associated risks, safety and security provision associated with the project activities

appear to be acceptable. Hence the project in totality may be considered environmentally safe.



CHAPTER – 10

DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED

In 1986, ECO CHEM SALES & SERVICES (ECSS) started with a set of limited services and unlimited

dreams backed with a vision to develop into a full service environmental and engineering group. Focused

efforts with transparent policies towards pursuit of excellence formed the way of life. Very shortly we were

recognized as Environmental Specialists.

Today, the small group has evolved into a sizeable organization of ECO Group of Companies, which

comprises of two main arms viz. ECOSYSTEM RESOURCE MANAGEMENT PRIVATE LIMITED and

ECO CHEM SALES & SERVICE with several sub divisions.

10.1 INTRODUCTION

ECOSYSTEM RESOURCE MANAGEMENT PRIVATE LIMITED (ERM) is one of the leading

Companies in the field of Environment Service Provider‘s in India. It is an organization with 27 years of rich

experience dedicated to promotion of advanced environmental technologies and indigenous development with

Research & Development for industries &community at large. We are working in the field of Consultancy and

provide Turnkey Environmental and Engineering solutions since 1986.

ECO CHEM SALES & SERVICE (ECSS), an extended arm of Ecosystem Resource Management Pvt. Ltd.

is a group of Scientists, Engineers, and Professional Pollution Consultants. We are a NABET Accredited

company having accreditation in 15 industrial sectors of the schedule of industries. We take up consultancy

projects including conducting of Environment Impact Assessment Studies, Risk Assessment Studies, life cycle

assessment, preparing EIA/EMP Reports, Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Reports, Preparation of

DPR, undertaking Third Party Inspection and Project Management Consultancy, in accordance with various

statutory clearances like Environment Clearance, CRZ Clearance, Forest Clearance, CTE, CCA etc., from

Ministry of Environment and Forest & State Pollution Control Boards.

10.1.1 GROUP COMPANIES & THEIR ACTIVITIES

1. SHRIPAD CONCHEM PRIVATE LIMITED

The flagship Company of SHRIPAD Group, having ISO 9001:2008 Certification is an Authorized Stockist,

Supplier and leading Applicator of world famous and specialty construction chemicals. Making of Cement

Concrete Road/ Floor by using Tremix Vacuum Dewatering system, Epoxy Flooring, Various kind of



Protective Coatings, Joint Sealing & Water Proofing, Maintenance and Rehabilitation of Structures, Repairing

& Strengthening of Bridges, RCC Chimney, Jetty and other structures, Epoxy Lining, Making of

expansion/construction joints etc. are the main job services the company offers.

2. SHRIPAD CONSTRUCTION

This Company is purely engaged in the civil construction. Building Construction is the area where the

company proved it‘s competence since last two decades. The Company served number of Clients both in

Private & Public Sectors. The construction activities include Infrastructural Projects like Development of small

villages; Institutional Projects like Colleges, Schools, Hospitals, Court buildings; Residential Private

Apartments, Staff quarters & Bungalows; Industrial Projects like construction of textile processing units,

foundation units, DM plants, STP and ETP of various industries.

3. SHRIPAD BUILDING PRODUCTS

The firm stands for utilization of new techniques and technologies in the field of Building Construction by way

of manufacturing Fly Ash Bricks. Over & above manufacturing of Fly Ash Bricks by automatic Hydraulic

Brick Plant, we have been appointed as a franchise manufacturers & distributors of Shell Bitumen for the

product Shelmac PR. Shelmac PR- An instant All-weather Pothole Repair Solution on both Bituminous and

concrete roads.

4. SHRIPAD CONCRETE PRIVATE LIMITED

This is the Ready Mix Concrete venture of SHRIPAD Group and actively engaged in Manufacturing and

Supplying of Ready Mix Concrete (RMC) in various grades. It‘s manufacturing unit / Computerized Batching

Plant is highly equipped with modern machineries with the technologies of Schwing Stetter of Germany with a

production Capacity of 30 Cubic Meter of Concrete Per Hour & 12 No‘s of Transit Mixers runs round the

clock to ensure speedy and timely delivery of concrete.

5. SHAYNE CONSULTANTS

Shayne Consultants is a full fledge Project Management Consultancy Firm which undertakes the PMC for

several heavy construction projects such as road networks, bridges, flyovers, institutional construction, etc.

6. PYXIS NAUTICA ENGINEERING, LLC (USA)

Pyxis Nautica Engineering, LLC (PNE) is a registered American based firm housed at Laplace, Louisiana.

PNE undertakes international assignments including civil engineering design and consultancy and

environmental design, modeling, and regulatory compliance projects.



10.1.2 VISION & MISSION

VISION

To be a leading global environment consultant and engineering service provider of high repute with a steady

and sustainable growth and development.

MISSION

It is our mission to:

Adopt our Client‘s Environmental challenges as our own.

Promote recycling and reuse of waste, conserve resources, encourage efficient use of energy and improve

the quality of environment as a whole.

Continue to refine the quality of our services, expand and enhance our capabilities, increase our efficiency,

and heighten the standards of excellence.

Elevate the customer service and customer satisfaction to the highest level by providing techno-feasible and

economically viable solutions to their environmental problems.

Provide an equal opportunity for all our employees to succeed and to be rewarded for performance and

commitment.



10.1.3 KEY PERSONNEL

Mrs. Rekha S. Shah, (M.E. (Environment)), is the CEO of the company, with 30 years of experience, giving

core values to Integrity, Excellence, Generosity, Responsibility & Respect. She is a visionary and the driving

force behind all the activities of the company. Her high business acumen as a sound technocrat and efficient

administrator has resulted in taking the company to the highest level of repute as one of the leading

Environmental Consultants in India. Under her esteemed guidance & leadership, the company is cherishing its

services by a high caliber and talented team of Environment Engineers, Chemical Engineers & Scientists. It is

the business entrepreneurship of Mrs. Shah that has enabled the Company to serve more than 400 reputed

clients within a short span of time. Her inspiration to treat every new challenge as the next step to progress is

leading the company towards tremendous growth not only in size but also in quality and service.

Mr. Shirish P. Shah, (B.E. (Civil), is one of the Board of Directors‘ of the company, with 36 years of

experience. He is a technical expert in the field of Civil Engineering and construction, and has a caliber to

complete turnkey projects of high repute in scheduled time frame giving excellent results. His technical

knowhow and financial control has proved to be the key behind sustainable growth with profitability of the

Company. He has excellent HR Management skills which has helped the organization to reach the height of

excellence. His sincere efforts & management has led to development of high faith level in our clientage.

Mr. P.S. Patel, (B.E. (Chemical)), is an expert in Chemical Engineering and responsible for undertaking

Turnkey Environmental Projects from concept to commissioning. He has a good command over manpower

management and co-ordination with various agencies associated with the project to complete the projects in

schedule time frame with desired quality and satisfactory performance.

Mr. Dhaval S. Shah - (MS – (Environment Eng.) & MBA, USA), is an expert in Civil & Environment

Engineering and is responsible for all projects being carried out in terms of execution and management. His

expertise involves having good knowledge of innovative technologies in the field of design of Effluent

Treatment Plants, Solid Waste Management Techniques, Statistical Data Analysis, and Wetland Wastewater

Treatment Systems. He also has extensive experience in landfill designs, slope stability analysis, soil

consolidation analysis, design of Strom water / sewer drainage network, effluent pipelines, air emission

modeling, lighting surveys and traffic noise modeling. He has an experience in designing the coastal shoreline

protection structures like cofferdams. He also has the experience in preparing several engineering design reports

as well as permit application documents related to air, solid waste, wastewater and coastal engineering media.

Mrs. Ruchika D. Shah - (BS (Electrical Eng.), & MBA (Fin & Int. Audit), USA), has a diverse experience in

project management, co-ordination, operations management, marketing and financial analysis. Her involvement

in quality assurance and monitoring activities ensures a sustainable deliverable product for the clients and

customer satisfaction.



10.2 KEY TECHNICAL SERVICES

Environmental Services

o Environmental Consultancy

o Environmental Impact Assessment

o Environmental Audits

o Environmental Monitoring & Laboratory Services

o Clearance & Permits like NOC/CCA/EC/CRZ

Turnkey Projects / Wastewater Solutions

EPC Contracts – ETP/CETP/WTP/STP

Engineering & Design Services

Operation & Maintenance

Air Pollution Control Services

Solid Waste Management Services

Supply of ETP Chemical & Cultures

Supply of Water/Air Pollution and Control Equipment

Supply of RO, softening, DM plants, etc.



10.2.1 CERTIFICATES

NABL Accreditation

Certificate no. T – 2013, dated 26/10/2015 valid up to 25/10/2017 for testing of water, waste water,

sewage, air, noise and soil.

ISO certification (ISO 9001:2008 & 14001:2004)

ISO 14001:2004 Certificate no. 59879/A/0001/UK/En, dated 03/09/2013 valid up to 02/09/2016

ISO 9001:2008 Certificate no. 59879/B/0001/UK/En, dated 03/09/2013 valid up to 02/09/2016

ISO 18001:2008 Certificate no. OHS/03097, dated 08/01/2016 valid up to 07/01/2019

Registration as Env. Auditors with GPCB

GPCB approved as an Env. Auditors to carry out environmental audits for schedule – II category

industries as per the directives of honorable high court vide letter no. GPCB/EA-57(2)/301372 dated

17/01/2015 valid up to 31/12/2016.

10.2.2 NABET Approval

Eco Chem Sales and Services is NABET Accredited Company for conducting Environmental Impact

Assessment Studies (EIA) and obtaining Environmental Clearances. We have valid NABET certificate no.

NABET/EIA/1417/SA2 002, valid up to 10/03/2017.



No. Sector as per

NABET

Name of Sector

1 1 Mining of minerals including Open cast/ Underground mining

2 2 Offshore and onshore oil and gas exploration, development & production

3 4 Thermal Power Plants

4 8 Metallurgical industries (ferrous & non-ferrous) – both primary and secondary

5 9 Cement plants

6 16 Chemical Fertilizers

7 17 Pesticides industry and pesticide specific intermediates (excluding

formulations)

8 19 Textile – cotton and manmade fibres

9 21 Synthetic organic chemicals industry (dyes & dye intermediates; bulk drugs

and intermediates excluding drug formulations; synthetic rubbers; basic

organic chemicals, other synthetic organic chemicals and chemical

intermediates)

10 24 Pulp & paper industry excluding manufacturing of paper from wastepaper and

manufacture of paper from ready pulp without bleaching

11 27 Oil & gas transportation pipeline (crude and refinery/ petrochemical products),

passing through national parks/ sanctuaries/coral reefs /ecologically sensitive

areas including LNG terminal

12 28 Isolated storage & handling of Hazardous chemicals (As per threshold

planning quantity indicated in column 3 of schedule 2 & 3 of MSIHC Rules

1989 amended 2000)

13 32 Common hazardous waste treatment, storage and disposal facilities (TSDFs)

14 33 Ports, harbours, jetties, marine terminals, break waters and dredging



No. Sector as per

NABET

Name of Sector

15 34 Highways, Railways, transport terminals, mass rapid transport system

16 36 Common Effluent Treatment Plants (CETPs)

17 38 Building and large construction projects including shopping malls,

multiplexes, commercial complexes, housing estates, hospitals, institutions



Annexure-1 Environmental Clearance



Annexure-2 CC&A Copy



Annexure-3 Land Documents



Annexure-4 Water Withdrawal Permission



Annexure-5 Gazette Notification



Annexure-6 Mutual Aid Agreement



Annexure-7 EHS Policy



Annexure-8 Health record



Annexure-9 CC&A Compliance



Annexure-10 EC Compliance

~. :., ; '..: ,. ;;; ADITYA BIRI1A:.

HINDALCO

To,The DirectorMinistry of Environment, Forest & Climate ChangeRegional office, Western RegionKendriya Paryavaran BhavanLink Road No.3, Ravi Shanker NagarBHOPAL- 462016. (M.P.)

Dt. 14-04-2016

Kind Attn: Dr. A. Mehrotra

Sub: Six Monthly Compliance report for Oct-15 to March-16.

Ref: 1. Environmental clearance letter no. J-11 011/927/2008-IA-II (I) dated 11.02.2009.2. Environmental clearance letter no. J-11011/220/2004-IA II (I) dated 18.03.2005:3. Environmental clearance letter no. J-11 011/86/2002- IA II (I) dated 10.02.2004.4. Environmental clearance letter no. J-11011/81/2000- IA " (I) dated 08.01.2002.5. Environmental clearance letter no. J-1101117194-IA" dated 14.03.1995

Sir,

Please find enclosed herewith the descriptive reports along with necessary annexure onstatus of compliance to conditions of above mentioned Environmental Clearances for theperiod of October -15 to March -16.

Submitted for your kind perusal please.

Thanking You,

Yours faithfully,

Hi alco Industries Ltd.( n': Birla Copper)

.tCQ~S-~---:td.<:::'

Cf)1<1i61 £I / OFFICEq ~ict'< 0 I -qcf crt 1f?l\<.'1 \!~ (q3-~•.t'*n-n\!l)Mini trJ of Envirorifi1@t& Forests (C)af.t~:r cpl~l~ (4-A~q11al?T)Regional Office 0Nestern Region)

~ h::r:QJ-462016

Dr. P. . andgeJ-Head (Q & Env.)

-Encl: As Above.

cc:The Additional Director (S)Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate ChangeGovernment of IndiaParyavaran Bhavan,CGO complex, Lodhi roadNew Delhi - 110 003

HINDALCO INDUSTRIESLIMITED(UNIT: BIRLACOPPER)P.O.: Dahej, Dist. Bharuch,Gujarat-392 130, INDIA.Telephone +91 2641 256004-6Fax +912641251002-3

Regd. Off Century Shavan, 3rd Floor, I Website www.hindalco.ccmDr. Annie Besant Road, Worli, Mumbai 400 030. India Email [email protected] +91 22 66626666 Ccrporats Identity No. L27020MH1958PLCOl',238

HINDALCO INDUSTRIES LIMITED (UNIT: BIRLA COPPER)

Documents

Transcript of HINDALCO INDUSTRIES LIMITED (UNIT: BIRLA COPPER)